WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual

WANsuite 5160/5130 Reference Manual
WANsuite® 5160/5130
Reference Manual
August 2002
34-00298.M
i
Copyright Notice
Copyright © 2002 Verilink Corporation. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be
reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language
in any form by any means without the written permission of Verilink.
Manual Reorder # 34-00298.M
August 2002
Verilink® and WANsuite® are registered trademarks of the Verilink Corporation. FrameStart™,
WANsight™, and ServiceAware™ are trademarks of the Verilink Corporation.
Trademarks
All other brand and product names used herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective manufacturers.
Documentation
Disclaimer
This document does not create any express or implied warranty about Verilink or about its products or services. Verilink’s sole warranty is contained in its product warranty. The end-user documentation is shipped with Verilink’s products and constitutes the sole specifications referred to
in the product warranty. Verilink has made reasonable efforts to verify that the information contained herein is accurate, but Verilink assumes no responsibility for its use or for any infringement of patents or other rights of third parties that may result. The customer is solely
responsible for verifying the suitability of Verilink’s products for its use. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Warranty
Verilink's product warranty is included at the back of this document.
FCC Requirements
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used
in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user is required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device must
also accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: For use only with a certified Class 2 power supply. See Power Source in
Appendix A, Specifications.
WARNING: Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the rear or bottom of the unit is a
label that contains the FCC registration number and other information. If requested, provide this
information to the telephone company.
1
All direct connections to the network lines must be made using standard plugs and jacks
(compliant with Part 68). The table below presents a list of applicable registration jack
USOCs, facility interface codes (FICs), and service order codes (SOCs). These are required
when ordering service from the telco.
Port ID
1.544
1.544
1.544
1.544
2
ii
WANsuite 5160/5130
Mbps
Mbps
Mbps
Mbps
SF
SF, B8ZS
ANSI ESF
ANSI ESF, B8ZS
REN/ SOC
FIC
USOC
6.0F
04DU9- BN
04DU9- DN
04DU9- 1KN
04DU9- 1SN
RJ-48C jack
If the unit appears to be malfunctioning, it should be disconnected from the network lines
until the source of trouble is determined to be your equipment or the telephone line. If your
equipment needs repair, it should not be reconnected until it is repaired.
Canadian Emissions
Requirements
3
The unit has been designed to prevent harm to the network. If the telephone company finds
that the equipment is exceeding tolerable parameters, it can temporarily disconnect service.
In this case, the telephone company will give you advance notice, if possible.
4
No customer is authorized to repair this equipment, regardless of warranty status.
5
If the telephone company alters its equipment in a manner that will affect the use of this
device, it must give you warning so that you have the opportunity for uninterrupted service.
You will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
6
If the equipment malfunctions, all repairs should be performed by our company or an
authorized agent. It is the responsibility of users requiring service to report the need for
service to our company or to one of our authorized agents.
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital
apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques (de la class A) prescrites dans le Règlement sur le brouillage
radioélectrique edicté par le ministère des Communications du Canada.
Safety Precautions
When handling this equipment, follow these basic safety precautions to reduce the risk of electric shock and injury:
•
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product and in the manual.
•
Unplug the hardware from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a slightly damp cloth for cleaning.
•
Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. It may fall, causing serious damage to
the product.
•
Slots in the unit are provided for ventilation to protect it from overheating. These openings must not
be blocked or covered. Never place this product near a radiator or heat register.
•
This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label
and manual. If you are unsure of the type of power supply you are using, consult your dealer or local
power company.
•
Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord interferes
with the free movement of people.
•
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords, as this can result in fire or electric shock.
•
Never push objects of any kind into the unit. They may touch dangerous voltage points or short out
parts that could result in fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on this equipment.
•
Unplug the equipment from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the
following conditions:
•
When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.
•
If liquid has been spilled into the product.
•
If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
•
If the product has been dropped or if the housing has been damaged.
iii
iv
WANsuite 5160/5130
Table of Contents
Preface
About this Manual ................................................................................................................................ xi
Manual Organization ...................................................................................................................... xi
Typographic Conventions ............................................................................................................. xii
Customer Service and Technical Support ............................................................................................ xii
Support from Your Network Supplier ........................................................................................... xii
Support from Verilink ................................................................................................................... xii
Telephone .............................................................................................................................. xiii
E-mail .................................................................................................................................... xiii
Internet ................................................................................................................................... xiii
Returning a Unit to Verilink ............................................................................................................... xiii
Chapter 1 About the WANsuite 5160/5130
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Features of the WANsuite 5160/5130 ................................................................................................ 1-3
Performance ................................................................................................................................. 1-3
SNMP Management ..................................................................................................................... 1-3
Intelligent WAN Access Architecture ......................................................................................... 1-3
Optional Advanced Network Management .................................................................................. 1-4
About FrameStart Technology ........................................................................................................... 1-4
WANsuite 5160/5130 Overview and Advantages .............................................................................. 1-5
Features Summary .............................................................................................................................. 1-5
Front Panel .......................................................................................................................................... 1-7
Rear Panel Connections .................................................................................................................... 1-10
Supervisory Port ......................................................................................................................... 1-10
10/100 Ethernet .......................................................................................................................... 1-11
Ethernet LED Indicators ...................................................................................................... 1-11
Serial Interface(s) ....................................................................................................................... 1-11
Network Interfaces ..................................................................................................................... 1-12
Power Connection ...................................................................................................................... 1-12
Power Failure ....................................................................................................................... 1-13
Chapter 2 Installation
Unpacking and Inspection .................................................................................................................. 2-1
Supplied Materials .............................................................................................................................. 2-1
Installation Wizard .............................................................................................................................. 2-2
v
Chapter 3 Web Server Interface
Web Server Access ............................................................................................................................. 3-1
Layout of Interface Screens ......................................................................................................... 3-2
Unit Screen ......................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Interfaces ............................................................................................................................................. 3-5
Network Screens .......................................................................................................................... 3-5
Error Status and Alarm Thresholds Table ............................................................................. 3-8
Serial Screens ............................................................................................................................. 3-11
Current Pin Status ................................................................................................................ 3-15
DTR Alarm Control and Status Table ................................................................................. 3-15
10/100 Ethernet Screen (IP Service Details) .............................................................................. 3-15
Supervisory Screen ..................................................................................................................... 3-18
Current Pin Status ................................................................................................................ 3-19
DTR Alarm Control and Status Table ................................................................................. 3-19
Services Screen ................................................................................................................................. 3-19
Data Line Monitor Configuration Table .................................................................................... 3-20
Adding a Service ........................................................................................................................ 3-21
Service Details Screen ................................................................................................................ 3-22
Interface Details Button ....................................................................................................... 3-23
Type Details Button ............................................................................................................. 3-23
Delete Service Button .......................................................................................................... 3-23
DS0 Monitor Details Screen (5160 Only) .................................................................................. 3-24
DS0 Status and Alarm Table ............................................................................................... 3-25
Frame Relay Service Details Screen .......................................................................................... 3-27
Status and Alarms Table ...................................................................................................... 3-31
Frame Relay Port Statistics Screen ...................................................................................... 3-32
SCADA Details Screen .............................................................................................................. 3-34
PPP Service Details Screen ........................................................................................................ 3-36
Parameters To Negotiate ..................................................................................................... 3-38
PPP Statistics ....................................................................................................................... 3-38
PAP Table ............................................................................................................................ 3-40
CHAP Table ........................................................................................................................ 3-41
IP Service Details Screen ........................................................................................................... 3-41
Applications ...................................................................................................................................... 3-42
Endpoint Table Screen ............................................................................................................... 3-42
Endpoint Details Screen ...................................................................................................... 3-42
Endpoint Service Details Screen ......................................................................................... 3-45
DLCI Details Screen ............................................................................................................ 3-45
Service Aware Screen ................................................................................................................ 3-50
Rule Details Screen ............................................................................................................. 3-51
Traffic Meter Statistics Screen ............................................................................................ 3-53
SNMP Details Screen ................................................................................................................. 3-54
Diagnostics Screen ..................................................................................................................... 3-55
Test Details Screens ............................................................................................................. 3-55
Trap Log Screen ......................................................................................................................... 3-59
Top Talkers ................................................................................................................................ 3-60
IP Gateway Details Screen ......................................................................................................... 3-61
RIP Parameters .................................................................................................................... 3-62
vi
WANsuite 5160/5130
OSPF Parameters ................................................................................................................. 3-62
Circuit Table Screen ............................................................................................................ 3-63
Static Routes Screen ............................................................................................................ 3-65
Static ARP Table Screen ..................................................................................................... 3-68
Trusted Neighbor Table Screen ........................................................................................... 3-70
Area Table Screen ............................................................................................................... 3-71
Virtual Link Table Screen ................................................................................................... 3-73
TCP Server ................................................................................................................................. 3-74
TCP Server Details Screen .................................................................................................. 3-74
Network Address Translation (NAT) ......................................................................................... 3-76
NAT Details Screen ............................................................................................................. 3-77
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) ........................................................................ 3-82
DHCP Server Details Screen ............................................................................................... 3-83
Bridge ......................................................................................................................................... 3-87
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) ..................................................................................... 3-91
Encryption .................................................................................................................................. 3-91
Utilities ............................................................................................................................................. 3-92
Upload/Save ............................................................................................................................... 3-92
Password .................................................................................................................................... 3-93
Log Out ...................................................................................................................................... 3-94
In-band Management ................................................................................................................. 3-94
Use of Connected Local Router ........................................................................................... 3-94
Use of Local WANsuite 5160/5130 as a Gateway .............................................................. 3-95
Chapter 4 VT100 Interface
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Accessing the VT100 Interface .................................................................................................... 4-1
Screen Components ...................................................................................................................... 4-1
Cursor Controls ............................................................................................................................ 4-2
Field Types ................................................................................................................................... 4-2
Menu Structure ............................................................................................................................. 4-3
System Screen ..................................................................................................................................... 4-4
Maintenance Reset ....................................................................................................................... 4-5
Save and Restart ........................................................................................................................... 4-6
Interfaces Screen ................................................................................................................................. 4-6
Network Screens .......................................................................................................................... 4-7
Error Status and Alarm Thresholds Table ........................................................................... 4-10
Performance Screens ........................................................................................................... 4-11
Serial Screens ............................................................................................................................. 4-13
10/100 Ethernet (IP Details) Screen ........................................................................................... 4-17
Supervisory Configuration Screen ............................................................................................. 4-18
Service Table Screen ........................................................................................................................ 4-20
Data Line Monitor Configuration Table .................................................................................... 4-20
Service Details Screen ......................................................................................................... 4-23
DS0 Monitor Details Screen (5160 Only) .................................................................................. 4-24
DS0 Status and Alarm Table ............................................................................................... 4-24
Frame Relay Service Details Screen .......................................................................................... 4-26
vii
Frame Relay Statistics Screen ............................................................................................. 4-31
PPP Service Details Screen ........................................................................................................ 4-33
Parameters to Negotiate ....................................................................................................... 4-34
PPP Statistics ....................................................................................................................... 4-35
PAP Table ............................................................................................................................ 4-36
CHAP Table and Details Screens ........................................................................................ 4-37
SCADA Service Details Screen ................................................................................................. 4-38
IP Service Details Screen ........................................................................................................... 4-40
Applications ...................................................................................................................................... 4-40
Endpoint Table Screen ............................................................................................................... 4-40
Endpoint Details Screen ...................................................................................................... 4-41
Endpoint Service Details Screen ......................................................................................... 4-44
DLCI Details Screen ............................................................................................................ 4-44
DLCI Table Screen .............................................................................................................. 4-48
Service Aware Screen ................................................................................................................ 4-49
Rule Configuration Screen .................................................................................................. 4-50
Traffic Meter Statistics Screen ............................................................................................ 4-51
SNMP Details Screen ................................................................................................................. 4-52
Diagnostics Screen ..................................................................................................................... 4-53
Test Details Screens ............................................................................................................. 4-53
Trap Log Screen ......................................................................................................................... 4-57
Top Talkers Screen .................................................................................................................... 4-57
IP Gateway Screen ..................................................................................................................... 4-58
RIP Parameters .................................................................................................................... 4-59
OSPF Parameters ................................................................................................................. 4-59
Circuit Table Screen ............................................................................................................ 4-60
Static Route Table Screen .................................................................................................... 4-62
Static ARP Table Screen ..................................................................................................... 4-65
Trusted Neighbors Screen ................................................................................................... 4-66
Area Table Screen ............................................................................................................... 4-67
Virtual Link Table Screen ................................................................................................... 4-69
TCP Server ................................................................................................................................. 4-71
TCP Server Screen ............................................................................................................... 4-71
Network Address Translation (NAT) ......................................................................................... 4-73
NAT Details Screen ............................................................................................................. 4-74
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) ........................................................................ 4-80
DHCP Server Details Screen ............................................................................................... 4-81
Bridge ......................................................................................................................................... 4-84
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) ..................................................................................... 4-88
Encryption .................................................................................................................................. 4-89
Chapter 5 Front Panel LCD Interface
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Description of Front Panel ........................................................................................................... 5-1
LCD Front Panel Operation ................................................................................................................ 5-3
Password ...................................................................................................................................... 5-3
Interface Conventions .................................................................................................................. 5-4
Menu Title ............................................................................................................................. 5-4
viii
WANsuite 5160/5130
Menu Element ........................................................................................................................ 5-4
Information Element .............................................................................................................. 5-5
Cursor .................................................................................................................................... 5-5
Main Menu .......................................................................................................................................... 5-5
Alarms Menu ................................................................................................................................ 5-5
Network 1 and Network 2 (5160) or Network (5130) Alarm Status Menu .......................... 5-6
DTR Alarm ............................................................................................................................ 5-8
Reset Timer ............................................................................................................................ 5-8
Reset Alarms .......................................................................................................................... 5-8
Performance Menu ....................................................................................................................... 5-8
Maintenance Menu ....................................................................................................................... 5-9
Network Maintenance Menu ................................................................................................. 5-9
Serial Maintenance Menu .................................................................................................... 5-11
Configuration Menu ................................................................................................................... 5-12
TCP/IP Configuration Menu ............................................................................................... 5-12
Network 1 (5160) or Network (5130) Configuration Menu ................................................ 5-13
Network 2 Configuration Menu (5160 Only) ...................................................................... 5-15
Serial 1 and Serial 2 (5160) or Serial (5130) Configuration Menus ................................... 5-17
Supervisory Configuration Menu ........................................................................................ 5-21
Utilities Menu ............................................................................................................................. 5-22
Maintenance Reset ............................................................................................................... 5-22
Set Password ........................................................................................................................ 5-22
LCD E/D .............................................................................................................................. 5-23
Log Out Menu ............................................................................................................................ 5-23
Appendix A Specifications
Network 1 (or Network) Interface ..................................................................................................... A-1
Network 2 Interface (5160 Only) ...................................................................................................... A-1
Serial Interface(s) ............................................................................................................................... A-2
IP Gateway ......................................................................................................................................... A-2
10/100 Ethernet (IP Gateway or Management) .................................................................... A-2
Management Interfaces ...................................................................................................................... A-2
10/100 Ethernet (Management or IP Gateway) .................................................................... A-2
Supervisory Port ................................................................................................................... A-2
Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................................ A-2
Alarms ................................................................................................................................................ A-3
Power ................................................................................................................................................. A-3
Mechanical ......................................................................................................................................... A-3
Environmental .................................................................................................................................... A-3
Frame Relay Statistics Collected in 96 15-minute Intervals ............................................................. A-5
PPP Statistics Collected in 96 15-minute Intervals ........................................................................... A-5
Industry Listings ................................................................................................................................ A-5
Ordering Information ......................................................................................................................... A-6
ix
Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................................... A-6
Connector Pin Assignments ............................................................................................................... A-7
Serial Interface Pin Assignments, DTE Mode (Packet Use Only) ............................................. A-7
Serial Interface Pin Assignments, DCE Mode ........................................................................... A-9
Ethernet Connection Pin Assignments ........................................................................................ A-9
Network 1 (5160) or Network (5130) Interface Pin Assignments ............................................ A-10
Network 2 (5160 Only) Interface Pin Assignments .................................................................. A-10
Supervisory Port Pin Assignments ............................................................................................ A-10
Appendix B SNMP Agent
Introduction .........................................................................................................................................B-1
SNMP Configuration Parameters .......................................................................................................B-1
SNMP MIBs .......................................................................................................................................B-1
SNMP Trap Configuration .................................................................................................................B-2
Generic MIB Loading Instructions ...................................................................................................B-10
x
WANsuite 5160/5130
PREFACE
CHAPTER 0
About this Manual
This reference guide for the Verilink WANsuite 5160/5130 intelligent
integrated access device (I2AD) describes unit features and specifications,
configuration, and cabling. It is not a users guide containing step-by-step
procedures. This manual is designed to be used as a reference regarding
commands, interface ports, configuration parameters, and other information
specific to your 5160/5130 unit.
Much of the information in this manual applies to the WANsuite 5160 and the
WANsuite 5130 units. The screen captures throughout the manual are, for the
most part, 5160 screens; however, where differences are significant, those
differences are noted. When this manual refers to the unit, you should assume
the information applies to both units.
Manual Organization
The chapters and appendices in this manual are arranged for quick reference
when you need it. You do not have to read previous chapters to understand
the subsequent chapters. Appendices are designed to complement the main
chapters.
•
Chapter 1, "About the WANsuite 5160/5130" – This chapter describes
product features and capabilities.
•
Chapter 2, "Installation" – This chapter describes unit port connections and
powering information.
•
Chapter 3, "Web Server Interface" – This chapter describes the menu screens
and configuration parameters accessed through the Web server interface.
•
Chapter 4, "VT100 Interface" − This chapter describes the menu screens and
configuration parameters accessed through the VT100 interface.
•
Chapter 5, "Front Panel LCD Interface"– This chapter describes the methods
and options for configuring and controlling the unit through the front panel
LCD interface.
•
Appendix A, "Specifications" – This appendix defines the specifications for
the WANsuite 5160/5130. In addition, this section provides ordering
Preface
xi
information and all the connector pin assignments for the interfaces on the
back of the WANsuite 5160/5130.
•
Appendix B, "SNMP Agent" − This appendix defines which Management
Information Base (MIB) files are supported by the WANsuite 5160/5130
SNMP agent. In addition, instructions are provided for loading these MIB
files into most SNMP management stations.
Typographic Conventions
The following table lists the conventions used throughout this guide.
Convention
Description
A Notice calls attentions to important features or instructions.
A Caution alerts you to serious risk of data loss or other
results that may cause you or the unit trouble if the warning is
not heeded.
A Warning alerts you to the risk of serious damage to the unit
or injury and possible death to the end user.
Customer Service and Technical Support
Verilink provides easy access to customer support information through a
variety of services. This section describes these services.
Support from Your Network Supplier
If assistance is required, contact your network supplier. Many suppliers are
authorized Verilink service partners who are qualified to provide a variety of
services, including network planning, installation, hardware maintenance,
application training, and support services. When you contact your network
supplier for assistance, have the following information ready:
•
•
•
Diagnostic error messages
A list of system hardware and software, including revision levels
Details about recent configuration changes, if applicable
Support from Verilink
If you are unable to receive support from your network supplier or want to
contact us directly, Verilink offers worldwide customer support by telephone,
e-mail, and through Verilink’s Internet Web site.
xii
WANsuite 5160/5130
Telephone
Customer support is available by telephone 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. To
speak directly with a Verilink customer service representative, you may dial
one of the following numbers:
•Sales and Marketing:
•Technical Support:
800-VERILINK (837-4546)
800 -285-2755 (toll-free)
256-327-2255 (local)
E-mail
You can request sales and marketing information or pose a technical support
question about your Verilink product by contacting us at the e-mail addresses
provided below. Verilink will respond to e-mailed requests for support during
regular business hours (8–5 CST, Monday–Friday).
•Sales and Marketing:
•Technical Support:
info@verilink.com
support@verilink.com
Internet
Visit Verilink’s Web site to access the latest Verilink product information,
technical publications, news releases, contact information, and more:
http://www.verilink.com
If this reference manual is revised to reflect code changes or other updates,
the most recent version will be posted to the Verilink Web site.
Returning a Unit to Verilink
If for any reason you must return your Verilink product, it must be returned
with the shipping prepaid, and packaged to the best commercial standard for
electronic equipment. Verilink will pay shipping charges for delivery on
return. You are responsible for mode and cost of shipment to Verilink.
You must have a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number marked on
the shipping package. To obtain an RMA number, call Customer Service at
800-926-0085, extension 2282 or 2232. Products sent to Verilink without
RMA numbers will be returned to the sender unopened, at the sender’s
expense.
A product sent directly to Verilink for repair must first be assigned an RMA
number. You may obtain an RMA number by calling Customer Service at
800-926-0085, extension 2282 or 2232.
When calling Verilink for an RMA, please have the following information
available:
•
•
Model number and serial number for each unit
Reason for return and symptoms of problem
Preface
xiii
•
•
Purchase order number to cover charges for out-of-warranty items
Name and phone number of person we can contact if we have questions about
the unit(s)
The address for you to use when returning a unit to Verilink will be provided
when the RMA is issued. The standard delivery method for return shipments
is Standard Ground for domestic returns and International Economy for
international returns (unless otherwise specified).
xiv
WANsuite 5160/5130
CHAPTER
1
ABOUT THE WANSUITE
5160/5130
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
The telecommunications network service market is rapidly changing, where
network monitoring, control, and higher performance in packet processing are
not only expected, but demanded, at competitive price points. Verilink’s
WANsuite family is based on our innovative, next-generation WAN access
architecture − a highly flexible and powerful architecture that can meet the
needs of many different customers in many different applications. Because it
is so flexible, WANsuite products will continually evolve, offering our
customers cutting-edge features at competitive prices.
The WANsuite 5160 is a service-aware T1/FT1 CSU/DSU with two Network
ports (both of which operate in long-haul and short-haul mode); two Serial
ports software-configurable for RS-232, EIA-530, or V.35 electrical
connections; an asynchronous Supervisory port; a 10/100Base-T Ethernet
interface; four status LEDs; an LCD front panel; and three input control keys.
The WANsuite 5130 has one Serial port and does not have a Network 2 port.
Except for these two differences, the 5130 has the same features as the 5160.
Capable of accommodating a wide range of network configurations, the
WANsuite 5160 and 5130 effectively combine voice, data, and network traffic
over a single transmission facility and work with industry-standard network
management solutions.
All of WANsuite 5160/5130’s installation, performance configuration, traffic
monitoring, alarm reporting, and diagnostic capabilities can be configured
through the units’ embedded Web server interface (WANsight™) using
Microsoft® Internet Explorer™. The Web server interface can be accessed
locally through the Ethernet port or the Supervisory port, or remotely through
the Network port. Especially advantageous is WANsuite’s advanced
monitoring and control capability that gives network administrators the
ability to plan future capacity requirements. To extend the WANsuite
5160/5130’s functionality even further, Verilink offers an element
management software system for reporting and real-time diagnostics.
About the WANsuite 5160/5130
1-1
The unit’s built-in ServiceAware™ technology lets network managers
maximize available WAN bandwidth and verify SLAs. This management
platform lets the end user see network activity (performance) and problems
(diagnostics) on any permanent virtual circuit (PVC), access line or physical
circuit.
Verilink’s FrameStart™ technology is standard with the
WANsuite 5160/5130 and benefits the initial installation of frame relay
circuits by eliminating the requirement for a frame relay test set. FrameStart
ensures that T1 circuit status, signal quality, loopback code detection, access
link condition, and the various Layer 2 frame relay investigation and reporting
features are available and accurate.
Another feature of the WANsuite product line, IP Gateway enables IP
packet routing throughout a LAN/WAN network architecture using static
routing configurations or dynamic routing protocols (Routing Information
Protocol − RIP 1 and RIP 2 − or Open Shortest Path First − OSPF).
RIP 1 and RIP 2 allow routers to exchange routing information. WANsuite
then uses this information exchange to build routing tables for IP Packet
routes. After building the routing tables, WANsuite periodically broadcasts
the contents to neighboring routers so that your network can choose the most
efficient routes available.
OSPF uses link-state routing algorithms to calculate routes based on the
number of routers, transmission speeds, delays, and route costs. Using the
OSPF protocol, WANsuite works with other routers in your
telecommunications fabric to dynamically change routing “on the fly” to make
use of the most efficient and cost-effective transit across your network.
Because IP Gateway enables WANsuite to route IP traffic either statically or
dynamically across your LAN/WAN architecture, your need for costly routers
is substantially reduced. WANsuite is a one-stop solution that can help you
meet the requirements of your many different applications.
DHCP uses a server-client architecture to assign IP addresses to PCs and
workstations on the LAN. The DHCP server dynamically assigns these IP
addresses, which can be either temporary or permanent, to each PC or
workstation (DHCP client). These IP addresses are "housed" on the DHCP
server.
NAT enables an enterprise to set up two sets of IP addresses − one set for
internal network use (or LAN traffic) and one set for external use (or Internet
traffic). This can provide a layer of security for a company by eliminating
outside access to internal IP addresses from the Internet.
Bridging separate LANs together is another option for the IP traffic. Using
the IEEE Standard 802.1D Transparent Bridging specification, the
WANsuite 5160/5130 can simplify your network architecture by allowing you
to bridge separate LANs across a WAN so they operate as a single LAN.
The WANsuite 5160/5130 gives service providers and enterprise customers
the capability to monitor end-to-end network performance (with support
for up to 256 virtual circuits) as well as the capability to verify Service Level
Agreements (SLAs); isolate performance problems to the LAN, local loop, or
1-2
WANsuite 5160/5130
frame relay network; determine appropriate bandwidth needs; and monitor
network trends to aid in future capacity planning.
TCP Server, a feature of the WANsuite product line, provides connectivity
to multiple endpoints by associating a TCP port with each endpoint while
reducing the number of physical connections at the central site to one
10/100Base-T Ethernet port.
Features of the WANsuite 5160/5130
Performance
Historically, WAN access devices have tended to perform well as
single-function devices such as CSUs/DSUs, but have not been optimized to
address higher level traffic issues such as service levels and integration.
Verilink's architecture and Web-based user interface work together to address
all access issues as services and applications, rather than as circuits and
protocols, for exceptional WAN management performance.
To further leverage its Web browser interface, Verilink's new architecture also
allows firmware to be upgraded via the Web from a standard browser, with
password control, if desired.
SNMP Management
With integrated SNMP in-band management, enterprise managers can now
manage Verilink WANsuite units and their integral CSUs/DSUs as a single
unit. With only one LAN segment in the network, all Verilink WANsuite
platforms can be managed by SNMP. With self-learning functionality, these
platforms learn their frame relay environment and eliminate the need for
remote, trained personnel. By downloading all configuration parameters from
the central site, no interaction is required at remote sites to establish
connectivity. WANs can be constructed using frame relay or leased-line
services. Verilink’s WANsuite 5160/5130 allows any port to be configured for
any of its available service technologies through simple software
configuration. Network managers can now fine tune the enterprise network for
the lowest cost and highest performance.
Intelligent WAN Access Architecture
Verilink's next-generation WAN access architecture is built around a
PowerPC™ processor, and works with non-proprietary network management
solutions via SNMP. An embedded Web server supplies a simple-to-use
interface for configuration and statistics collection, with a service table for
mapping services to ports, an endpoint table for configuring and monitoring
service endpoints, and a user table for traffic monitoring and control.
About the WANsuite 5160/5130
1-3
Optional Advanced Network Management
As an option for the WANsuite 5160/5130, Verilink offers a network
management system based on RedPoint's NetVoyant™ software, which was
designed to provide IT professionals with the information required to make
informed, enterprise-wide capacity-planning and investment decisions.
NetVoyant is an NT-based element management system that includes an
ODBC-compliant database, CORBA IDLs for customization and flexibility,
real-time diagnostics, and extensive reporting and trending application
support. The solution employs an open-system, multi-vendor support approach
for network management, monitoring, and the collection of statistics from any
SNMP-based networking device, including Verilink equipment already in the
field.
WANsuite extends the functionality of NetVoyant’s software by incorporating
customized configuration modules. This advanced network management
system is offered as an option for the WANsuite 5160/5130. Please contact
Verilink for availability and pricing information.
About FrameStart Technology
The WANsuite 5160/5130’s FrameStart technology ensures that frame relay
service is operational prior to installation and connection to other equipment.
FrameStart’s integral frame relay circuit installation and diagnostic tools help
reduce equipment and installation costs, simplify configuration setup, and
alleviate frame relay connection uncertainties − all in one unit.
The WANsuite 5160/5130 supports both FrameStart Install and FrameStart
Monitor modes as well as Layer 2 statistics gathering and diagnostic
capabilities that maximize network availability and manage the growth of the
network.
FrameStart Install enables step-by-step validation of network operations and
requires no data terminal equipment such as routers or FRADs. If a DTE
device is connected, operation is halted to perform installation diagnostics.
With FrameStart Install, you have the power to perform advanced tests,
including the following:
•
•
•
•
Local Management Interface (LMI) Sourcing
End-to-end Integrity
PVC Delay Testing
Network Receive Level
FrameStart Monitor complements FrameStart Install to monitor real-time
network conditions nonintrusively when connected to real-world applications.
FrameStart Monitor diagnostics maintain and manage the activity of the frame
relay network from the host FrameStart unit. FrameStart Monitor also
performs the following:
•
•
1-4
LMI Monitoring
LMI Auto-Sourcing
WANsuite 5160/5130
•
•
SOS Mode
New Circuit Installation
WANsuite 5160/5130 Overview and Advantages
Verilink’s WANsuite 5160 and 5130 are innovative, highly intelligent,
software-based WAN access devices optimized for frame relay access. The
WANsuite 5160/5130 provides network managers with the tools necessary to
monitor and troubleshoot voice, data, and network transmission systems. The
ability to use the WANsuite 5160/5130 as an IP Gateway greatly increases its
flexibility while reducing the customer’s networking costs. In addition, the
WANsuite 5160/5130 delivers valuable tools for the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Measuring and reporting performance
Verifying Service Level Agreements (SLAs)
Managing network resources to ensure optimum performance
Analyzing trends to aid in network planning
Managing Web browser and/or in-band/out-of-band SNMP
WANsuite 5160/5130 advantages include the following:
•
Offers two Network ports, two Serial ports (one each on the WANsuite
5130), an asynchronous Supervisory port, and an Ethernet port − the
WANsuite 5160/5130 is extremely flexible and adapts to numerous
network applications.
•
Ensures a higher level of service − WANsuite 5160/5130 acts as an expert
frame relay Service Level advisor for service providers and users.
•
Lowers facility costs − WANsuite 5160/5130's easy installation and
configuration cut down on maintenance and sparing costs.
•
Reduces the need for costly routers with its IP Gateway feature − WANsuite
handles all your networking needs.
Features Summary
•
A Powerful Core Architecture:
• 10/100Base-T Ethernet port for Management or IP Gateway
• Single T1 Network port on the 5130 and two on the 5160 configurable in
either long-haul or short-haul modes
• Single Serial port on the 5130 and dual Serial ports on the 5160
software-configurable for RS-232, EIA-530, or V.35
• Supervisory port for local management via VT100
•
IP Gateway:
• Frame Relay or PPP
• 10/100Base-T Ethernet port
About the WANsuite 5160/5130
1-5
• Static routes
• Static Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
• Dynamic routing protocols, including RIP 1, RIP 2, and OSPF
• Un-numbered Network
• Address Management: NAT and DHCP
• Programmable alarm thresholds
•
Transparent Bridging
•
Configurable Serial (Data) Port:
• Supports V.35, EIA-530, and RS-232
•
Security Features
• IP Host Access List
• Multilevel password access
• NAT
•
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA):
• Diagnostics
•
Data Monitor function shows all traffic activity on a given RTU port of
a remote site, as if a data scope were physically connected between the
WANsuite unit and the RTU.
•
RTU loopback lets you set a remote unit’s RTU port in loopback mode
so that any data sent towards the RTU from the central site will be
echoed back towards the central site. Verifies data integrity to the RTU
port.
• TCP Server allows multiple connections to TCP clients.
• Asynchronous multicasting lets the WANsuite 5160/5130 transmit
identical data to multiple endpoints.
• SCADA traffic priority puts SCADA traffic in a specific queue over a
frame relay link and puts all other traffic (Ethernet, In-Band Management,
Serial Frame Relay) in a normal priority queue.
• Blowfish encryption on a per-DLCI basis with configurable encryption
key lengths up to 448 bits. This feature offers secure connections to
data-sensitive SCADA sites.
•
A Suite of Performance Monitoring Tools:
• Monitoring capability for up to 256 virtual circuits (Data Link Connection
Identifiers, or DLCIs)
• T1/FT1 performance monitoring, including complete diagnostic
capabilities and test modes and auto-learned DS0s.
• SLA monitoring and management
• Committed Information Rate (CIR) enforcement per DLCI
• Programmable alarm thresholds
1-6
WANsuite 5160/5130
• E-mail notification of alarm status for immediate notification of potential
network problems
•
Management Interfaces:
• WANsight − an innovative, embedded Web-based user interface for
remote configuration and real-time reporting via Web browser
(Verilink recommends Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher) that
decreases installation and configuration time for service employees,
simplifies troubleshooting and fault isolation of network problems, and
optimizes management of both TDM and frame-based services
• VT100 or TELNET
• Local Supervisory port
• Ethernet port for management or IP routing
•
•
LCD
Frame Relay Aware:
• Supports leased-line and frame relay services
• Layer 2 end-to-end visibility and control
• Embedded frame relay test set
• Layer 3 support for visibility beyond the Network layer (up to 25
protocols)
• “Top Talker” reports − lets you find out who’s generating the most IP
traffic on your LAN
Front Panel
The front panel of the WANsuite 5160 (Figure 1.1) provides three
user-activated input control buttons, four LED status indicators, and a 2-line,
16-character LCD that provides access to unit configuration, diagnostics, and
utilities.
Figure 1.1
Front Panel of WANsuite 5160
About the WANsuite 5160/5130
1-7
The front panel LED status indicators are defined in the table below:
Indicator
Description
NET
This indicator is off (not illuminated) when the port has not been
configured.
The indicator lights green when the T1 link is up and all
configured protocol services are established.
The indicator lights red if the T1 link is down and the configured
protocol is not established.
The indicator lights amber if the T1 link is up and at least one
configured protocol is not established.
#1 SERIAL and
#2 SERIAL
DTR Alarm Enabled:
This indicator is off (not illuminated) when the port has not been
configured.
The indicator lights green when DTR is active and the configured
protocol is established.
The indicator lights red when DTR is not active and the
configured protocol is not established.
The indicator lights amber when DTR is not active or the
configured protocol is not established.
DTR Alarm Disabled:
This indicator is off (not illuminated) when the port has not been
configured.
The indicator lights green when the configured protocol is
established.
The indicator lights red when the configured protocol is not
established.
POWER
This indicator lights green when power is applied to the unit.
The indicator lights amber in test modes (Port looped or BERT
active).
The front panel of the WANsuite 5130 (Figure 1.2) also provides three
user-activated input control buttons, four LED status indicators (although
different from the 5160), and a 2-line, 16-character liquid crystal display
(LCD) panel that provides access to unit configuration, diagnostics and
utilities.
Figure 1.2
1-8
WANsuite 5160/5130
WANsuite 5130 Front Panel
The WANsuite 5130’s front panel LED status indicators are defined in the
table below:
Indicator
Description
NET
This indicator is off (not illuminated) when the port has not been
configured.
The indicator lights green when the T1 link is up and all
configured protocol services are established.
The indicator lights red if the T1 link is down and the configured
protocol is not established.
The indicator lights amber if the T1 link is up and at least one
configured protocol is not established.
SERIAL
DTR Alarm Enabled:
This indicator is off (not illuminated) when the port has not been
configured.
The indicator lights green when DTR is active and the configured
protocol is established.
The indicator lights red when DTR is not active and the
configured protocol is not established.
The indicator lights amber when DTR is not active or the
configured protocol is not established.
DTR Alarm Disabled:
This indicator is off (not illuminated) when the port has not been
configured.
The indicator lights green when the configured protocol is
established.
The indicator lights red when the configured protocol is not
established.
ALARM
This indicator lights red if an alarm condition exists
The indicator lights amber if a “yellow” alarm condition exists.
POWER
This indicator lights green when power is applied to the unit.
The indicator lights amber in test modes (Port looped or BERT
active).
The user-activated input control buttons used to access and set configuration
and control options from the LCD menus are the same on both the 5160 and
5130, and are defined in the table below:
Button
Description
EXIT
The EXIT button lets you exit a menu option which then places the unit
in the next higher level in the menu hierarchy. If you are editing an
option and press the EXIT button, you will exit that screen without
saving any changes. If you are in the main menu, pressing EXIT logs off
the unit.
About the WANsuite 5160/5130
1-9
Button
Description
SCROLL
The SCROLL button lets you review the available options for a given
level in the menu hierarchy or to scroll through possible settings for a
parameter. You can also use the SCROLL button to set alphanumerical
values, where applicable, by scrolling incrementally through digits 0–9
or letters A–Z and a–z.
SELECT
The SELECT button lets you select the currently displayed option or
value for a given field, and is also used to enter an “edit” mode for
parameters that require user-specified input. Additionally, you can use
the SELECT button to confirm certain actions or settings.
Rear Panel Connections
The rear panel of the WANsuite 5160 has seven connectors − POWER,
SUPERVISORY PORT, 10/100 ETHERNET, SERIAL INTERFACE #1, SERIAL
INTERFACE #2, NET #2 , and NET #1 − as shown in Figure 1.3 below. For
more specific information regarding dimensions and optional equipment, refer
to Appendix A, Specifications.
Figure 1.3
WANsuite 5160 Rear Panel
The rear panel of the WANsuite 5130 has five connectors − POWER,
SUPERVISORY PORT, 10/100 ETHERNET, SERIAL INTERFACE, and NET −
as shown in Figure 1.4 below.
Figure 1.4
WANsuite 5130 Rear Panel
The following paragraphs describe the 5160/5130 connectors.
Supervisory Port
The SUPERVISORY PORT on the 5160/5130 is a DB-9 female DCE connector
configured for 8 bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit. Bit rates are configured
through the Web server (see Supervisory Screen on page 3-18) or VT100
interface (Supervisory Configuration Screen on page 4-18). The Supervisory
port speed can be set to 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,
115200 bps. The initial default rate of the Supervisory port is 19200 bps.
1-10
WANsuite 5160/5130
NOTICE: For information on pinout assignments for this connector, refer to
Supervisory Port Pin Assignments on page A-10. See Ordering
Information on page A-6 for information on cables for this connector.
The Supervisory port performs several different functions. It serves as the
VT100 interface port, providing VT100 screens. It also supports asynchronous
PPP, providing access to the Web Server interface. In addition, the
Supervisory port is an asynchronous data port. Data is encapsulated in frame
relay packets and then transmitted through the Network port.
On power-up, the Supervisory port sends out diagnostic messages at the bit
rate of 115.2 kbps until the Supervisory service acquires the Supervisory port.
These diagnostic messages can disrupt the connected device; however, you
can configure the unit to disable their transmission.
NOTICE: A null modem (crossover) cable is required to connect a modem to the
Supervisory port.
10/100 Ethernet
The WANsuite 5160/5130 provides one 10/100 ETHERNET interface. This
interface is an eight-pin modular jack that complies with standard
twisted-pair, 10/100Base-T requirements. The 10/100Base-T cable is supplied
by the end user. Refer to Ethernet Connection Pin Assignments on page A-9
for pin assignments and cable descriptions.
Ethernet LED Indicators
There are two unlabeled indicator LEDs on either side of the
10/100 ETHERNET jack. The LED on the left side of the jack pulses amber to
indicate data activity (either transmit or receive). The LED on the right side of
the jack lights green to indicate that the link layer is operational.
Serial Interface(s)
The two SERIAL interfaces on the 5160 and the single SERIAL interface on
the 5130 located on the rear of the units are multi-protocol interfaces
presented physically as DB-25 connections. The protocols supported by these
interfaces are RS-232, EIA-530, and V.35.
Optional cables that adapt the DB-25 interface to the 34-pin V.35 interface
are available. These cables are listed under Optional Equipment on page A-6.
DB-25–to–DB-25 cables are also available if your installation needs require
them. See Ordering Information on page A-6 for details. Pin assignments for
the Serial interface are also listed in Appendix A, Specifications.
About the WANsuite 5160/5130
1-11
CAUTION: FCC rules require that interconnecting cables carrying high-speed
data be shielded appropriately in order to minimize radio frequency
interference.
Network Interfaces
Labeled on the rear panel of the WANsuite 5160 as NET #1 and NET #2, and
on the 5130 as NET, these interfaces’ connections are standard RJ-48C,
eight-pin modular jacks that contain an automatic line build out (ALBO). The
ALBO allows the unit to be located a substantial distance away from the telco
network interface with a receive signal level to −27 dB. These interfaces
operate in either long-haul or short-haul mode. To view the pinout
assignments for these interfaces, refer to Network 1 (5160) or Network (5130)
Interface Pin Assignments and Network 2 (5160 Only) Interface Pin
Assignments on page A-10.
The Network interface transmit LBO level should be set as instructed in the
Line Build-out parameters section on page 3-7. Maximum suggested cable
lengths for the connection from the unit to the network are listed in the table
below. Calculations are based on a cable temperature of 70 °F, 0.083 µF/mile
capacitance, a 27-dB loss, and a 100-Ω, non-loaded, twisted-pair cable.
Cable Type
Loss per 1000 ft Max Cable Length
(dB)
(ft)
26-gauge PIC
6.8
4,400
24-gauge PIC
5.4
5,500
22-gauge PIC
4.2
7,100
19-gauge PIC
3.0
10,000
(PIC - Plastic Insulated Cable)
CAUTION: In accordance with FCC Rules, Part 68.218(b), you must notify the
telephone company prior to disconnecting this product.
Power Connection
The POWER port is an eight-pin circular mini-DIN connector that connects
either an autoranging 100–240 VAC (shown in Figure 1.5 below) or an
autoranging 18−150 VDC external power supply (connection shown in Figure
1.6 below) to the unit. The WANsuite 5160/5130 must be used with the UL
Listed/CSA Certified Class 2 power supply provided with the unit or ordered
separately from Verilink. The unit has no power switch.
1-12
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 1.5
WANsuite 5160/5130 AC Power Supply Unit
4
2
+5V
1
+5V
5
Shield Ground
Figure 1.6
8
GND
3
+5V
7
GND
6
GND
Connection for VDC Power Supply
When power is applied to the unit, the front panel indicators flash for
approximately 10 to 15 seconds as the unit initializes. The green POWER
LED on the front panel will remain illuminated as long as the unit receives
power. This LED turns amber when the unit is in test mode.
CAUTION: Always plug the external power supply into a grounded power outlet.
NOTICE: Power supply contacts In 1 and In 2 are polarity insensitive.
NOTICE: Per UL 1950 and CSA 950 Clause 1.7.2, if the power supply cord is
intended to serve as a disconnect device, an easily accessible socket
must be installed near the equipment.
Power Failure
If the indicator does not illuminate, check the power connections and the
primary AC circuit breaker.
About the WANsuite 5160/5130
1-13
The WANsuite 5160/5130 provides non-volatile memory retention of the unit
configuration in case of a power failure. This feature allows the unit to
automatically restore normal service and retain pre-existing time and date
information following a power loss.
1-14
WANsuite 5160/5130
CHAPTER
2
INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2
This chapter describes the contents of your WANsuite 5160/5130 shipment
and provides information on connecting and installing the unit.
The WANsuite 5160 and 5130 use an “Installation Wizard” to help you
automatically install the unit quickly and accurately. Procedures for using this
Installation Wizard are also described in this chapter.
Unpacking and Inspection
The WANsuite 5160/5130 is shipped in cardboard cartons with foam inserts
for shock and vibration protection. When your shipment arrives, inspect the
shipping container and contents and compare all items with those on the
packing list.
If the contents of the shipment are incomplete or if there is mechanical
damage or defect, notify Verilink Customer Service (see page xii). If the
shipping container or cushioning material is damaged, notify the carrier and
Verilink immediately and make a notation on the delivery receipt that the
container was damaged. (If possible, obtain the signature and name of the
person making delivery.) Retain the packaging material until the contents of
the shipment have been checked for completeness and the unit has been
checked both mechanically and electrically.
Supplied Materials
The WANsuite 5160/5130 shipment includes the following standard items:
•
•
•
•
•
WANsuite 5160 unit or WANsuite 5130 unit
External power supply and power cord
T1 network cable
Serial (Supervisory) cable
Verilink Documentation CD
Installation
2-1
For specific applications, see Optional Equipment on page A-6 for additional
cables and adapters. Contact Verilink Technical Support for further assistance
and specific part numbers.
Installation Wizard
One of the ways to configure and monitor the WANsuite 5160/5130 is
through the Web Browser interface. To gain access to this interface, the unit
must be configured with an IP Address. Verilink provides a DOS-based
program – the Verilink Configuration Wizard – to aid in this initial
configuration.
To configure the IP Address using the Verilink Configuration Wizard, use the
CD-ROM disk included with this product and follow the steps listed below.
NOTICE: You may also access the Verilink Configuration Wizard on
Verilink’s Web site: www.verilink.com.
1 Using the supplied cable, connect the unit’s DB-9 Supervisory port to a
COM port on your PC. (Take note of which COM port is connected.)
2 Insert the Verilink CD-ROM disc into your PC’s CD-ROM drive.
3 Use Windows “Explore” to view the contents of the CD and select the
folder labeled “Utilities.” In this folder will be a file named ipwiz.exe;
this executable file is the Verilink Configuration Wizard application.
Double-click on this file to launch the program. After the program is fully
launched, you will see the following screen:
4 Using the Tab key to move from field to field, move the cursor to the “COM
Port” field. Using the Spacebar, toggle between the available options until
the correct COM port is shown (COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4). Be sure
to choose the same COM port as the port to which you connected the unit.
5 By default, the “Baud Rate” field will display 115200 (bits per second). For
the purpose of this installation, do not change the displayed baud rate from
its default. Proceed directly to the next step.
2-2
WANsuite 5160/5130
6 Using the Tab key again, move the cursor to the “IP Address” field and
enter the appropriate IP Address for the unit (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx). If necessary,
repeat this process for the “Subnet Mask” and “Gateway Address” fields.
7 Next, move the cursor to the “Write To Unit” field and press the Enter key.
The program will prompt you to reset the unit.
8 To reset the unit, cycle the unit’s power (i.e., disconnect the power supply
cable from the unit and then reconnect it). The Configuration Wizard will
then automatically download the configuration information to the unit.
9 Take notice of the status messages displayed at the bottom of the
Configuration Wizard screen. When the download is complete, your PC will
beep and the status message bar will display “Finished.”
10 Finally, move the cursor to the “Exit” prompt and press Enter. The
Configuration Wizard program will close.
Installation
2-3
2-4
WANsuite 5160/5130
CHAPTER
3
WEB SERVER INTERFACE
CHAPTER 3
The WANsuite 5160/5130 has an innovative, embedded Web-based user
interface (WANsight) for remote configuration and real-time reporting via
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher. Access to the Web server interface
and how the interface is used to configure the WANsuite 5160/5130 unit are
described in detail below.
NOTICE: Verilink recommends the use of Microsoft’s Internet Explorer 5.0 or
higher because if you use other Internet browsers to access the Web
server interface, some screen elements will not display as described in
this manual.
NOTICE: The material presented in this chapter follows the order listed in the
navigation bar on the left side of the Web Server interface screen.
However, because the parameters you specify in the Service Table
attach protocols to interfaces, you must configure the Service Table
first. (See Services Screen on page 3-19.) You will not be able to
allocate channels (see Channel Table Details Screen on page 3-26)
until the Service Table has been configured.
Configuration through the VT100 interface is covered in Chapter 4, and
configuration through the front panel is covered in Chapter 5.
Web Server Access
You can access the Web Server interface by connecting to its IP address. This
connection can be directly through the 10/100 Ethernet port, in-band via PPP
over any port, or in-band via encapsulated IP traffic on the Frame Relay
circuit.
NOTICE: Any changes to the unit’s configuration MUST be followed by a
“Submit” if there is a “Submit” button on the menu. If you
change the Service Table, you must perform a “Save and
Restart.”
Web Server Interface
3-1
To access the Web Server interface, type the unit’s IP address in the
browser’s Address (or Location) field and press the “Enter” key.
Layout of Interface Screens
When you first access the Web Server interface, your browser will display a
screen that is divided into three frames. The upper frame forms a border
across the top of the screen; it identifies the Verilink unit in service and
displays the hardware and software revision and serial numbers under which
the unit is operating. The far right corner of the upper frame displays whether
or not a “Save and Restart” is necessary when parameters are changed on the
currently displayed screen.
The area beneath the upper frame is divided into two side-by-side frames. The
frame on the left side of this area depicts a hierarchical “tree” structure used
to navigate through the various interface screens. Each “branch” on the tree
guides you to more specific upper-level information about the unit and its
configuration. Note that the Interfaces, Applications, and Utilities branches do
not link to a page − these branches simply provide structure for navigation.
The frame on the right side of the screen will display the actual configuration
or display screen. The screen captures throughout this chapter show only the
configuration/display portion of the screen, except in the case of the Unit
screen, which shows all three frames. The Unit screen represents the top of
the navigation tree.
Unit Screen
The Unit screen shown in Figure 3.1 is the first screen displayed by your
unit’s Web Server interface. The Unit screen for the WANsuite 5130 is very
similar to the 5160, with the exception being that the 5130 has one Network
and one Serial interface listed in the navigation pane on the left-hand side of
the screen. The Unit screen lets you view and set specific information about
the unit in service.
3-2
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 3.1
Unit Screen
The Unit screen displays the following fields:
Field
Function
Object ID
Display-only field used to point an SNMP agent to this ID.
Up Time
Displays the amount of time the unit has been up and running.
Contact
Stores the name of a point-of-contact for system failure.
Name
Read/write field that holds the unit’s name.
Location
Read/write field that holds the unit's location.
FrameStart ID
Read/write field that holds the unit's ID that uniquely identifies
the unit and is used in the FrameStart applications.
LCD Interface
Lets the user enable or disable the LCD interface buttons of the
unit.
User Definable
Fields
Read/write fields for user-specific labels and values.
Information resides in non-volatile memory.
Time
Read/write field that holds the unit's internal time setting in
standard 24-hour HH:MM:SS format.
Date
Read/write field that holds the unit's internal date setting in
standard MM/DD/YY format.
Web Server Interface
3-3
The Unit screen provides the following user-activated buttons:
Maintenance Reset
Button
Function
Submit
Sets any values that have been changed. Use the top “Submit”
button to set any unit parameters changed in the upper section of
the screen, and the lower “Submit” button to set the real-time
clock.
Maintenance Reset
Brings up a screen where you can reset unit to its default TDM
or Packet, Packet 2, Packet 3, or Packet 4 configuration.
Save and Restart
Saves the current configuration and restarts the unit.
Use this button to access a screen where you can perform a Maintenance
Reset (Figure 3.2). When you click on the arrow in the pull-down menu box
on the screen, you will have the option to perform a TDM, Packet, Packet 2,
Packet 3, or Packet 4 reset. When you select one of these options, all previous
configurations will be lost and the unit will be set back to the specified
factory default.
Figure 3.2
Maintenance Reset Screen
NOTICE: Performing a “Maintenance Reset” or a “Save and Restart” will
terminate communications with the unit.
Save and Restart
3-4
Use this button to save the current configuration settings and then proceed
with a restart. Clicking the “Save and Restart” button on the Unit screen will
display a confirmation screen as shown in Figure 3.3 below. Click the “Save
and Restart” button on the confirmation screen to confirm the action.
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 3.3
Save and Restart Screen
Interfaces
The WANsuite 5160 has the following interfaces: Network 1, Network 2,
Serial 1, Serial 2, 10/100 Ethernet, and Supervisory. The WANsuite 5130 has
one Network and one Serial interface, but in other respects has the same
interfaces with the same parameters as the WANsuite 5160. Each of the
interfaces and their associated screens/menus are described below.
Network Screens
The WANsuite 5160 Network (Figure 3.4) screens let you view and make
changes to the Network interfaces’ configuration as described below. In
addition, the screens provide a table that displays the alarm values for the
Network interfaces. All Network ports operate in either long-haul or shorthaul mode. On the WANsuite 5160, the Network 1 and 2 screens are the same
except that at the top of the Network 2 screen (shown in Figure 3.5), there is
an additional parameter, “Function,” that’s described, along with the other
screen parameters, below.
Web Server Interface
3-5
Function (Network 2
Only)
Figure 3.4
Network 1 Screen
Figure 3.5
Network 2 Screen (Top Portion Only)
In the “Slaved” function, Network 2 is slaved and can only be mapped to
Network 1. In the Network function, Network 2 functions as an independent
network, but can only be mapped to Serial 2.
Values: Slaved, Network
Default: Slaved
NOTICE: The “Function” parameter fundamentally affects the operation of the
unit. Even though this parameter is found only on the Network 2 screen,
its setting affects both Network ports and the Service table.
Mode
3-6
Selects the network service type.
Values: Long Haul, Short Haul
Default: Long Haul
WANsuite 5160/5130
Line Build-Out (Long
Haul)
Sets the transmit Line Build Out (LBO) for the Long-Haul network interface.
Values: 0, −7.5, −15.0, −22.5 dB
Default: 0 dB
DSX Level (Short
Haul)
Specifies the DTE DSX-1 interface output level.
Values: 0−110, 111−220, 221−330, 331−440, 441−550, 551−660, >661 ft
Default: 0−110 ft
Framing
Selects the framing for the network side of the DSU/CSU.
Values ESF, D4
Default: ESF
Coding
Sets the network side line coding.
Values: AMI, B8ZS
Default: B8ZS
Timing
Sets the timing source to synchronize the unit’s internal timing generators. In
all cases, slips are controlled to occur on frame boundaries at the Network
ports when timing synchronization is lost. The options are as follows:
Network 1 (5160)
“Function” parameter (on the Network 2 screen) in “Slaved” mode − Internal,
Network 1, Network 2, Serial 1, Serial 2
“Function” parameter (on the Network 2 screen) in Network mode − Internal,
Network 1, Serial 1
Network 2 (5160)
“Function” parameter in “Slaved” mode − timing parameter is ignored in
Slave mode
“Function” parameter in Network mode− Internal, Network 2, Serial 2
Network (5130) − Internal, Network, Serial
Definitions of the timing sources are as follows:
Internal – The unit’s internal frequency standard (T1 1.544 Mbps ± 50 bps)
is used for all timing.
Network 1, Network 2, Network – Timing is derived from the Network port
recovered clock.
Serial 1, Serial 2, Serial – Timing is derived from the Serial port recovered
clock.
Zero Suppression
PRM Enable
Determines whether ones density insertion is activated after 15 zeros. This
parameter is ignored if the Coding parameter is set to “B8ZS.”
Values: Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
Lets you establish which performance messaging standard will be employed
to initiate Performance Report Message (PRM) functions. Setting this field to
Web Server Interface
3-7
“Enable” instructs the unit to use ANSI T1.403, which sends a PRM once
every second. Setting this field to “Disable” instructs the unit to use AT&T
TR54016, which provides performance reporting on request only.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
Learn DS0s on Boot
Learned DS0 Rate
Determines if the unit will attempt to discover active DS0s (after power-up,
Save and Restart). Active DS0s will then be assigned to the first associated
network service.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
Specifies the rate at which each discovered DS0 will be set.
Values: As 56K/64K
Default: As 64K
NOTICE: The unit will search for active DS0s for a maximum of 7 seconds if
learning “As 64k” and for 30 seconds if learning “As 56K.”
Error Status and Alarm Thresholds Table
The unit can be programmed to generate an alarm condition based on a
specific level of performance degradation. The Network screens present a
table that provides current error status and alarm threshold information.
Acceptable alarm thresholds are set for periods 15 minutes (900 seconds) and
sampled every second. The error types listed in the following paragraphs can
be preset to a value between 0 and 900 seconds. Setting a field to “0” (zero)
disables the alarm on that statistic. To effectively disable alarm reporting, set
all fields to “0” (zero).
The 15-minute time frame is not based on the TR 54016 or T1.403 interval
boundaries, but is a time window based on the accumulated counts over the
previous fifteen 1-minute intervals. In all cases, if the number of actual
network errored seconds in the previous 15 minutes reaches the preset
threshold for the specified error type, an alarm condition is declared.
The four columns of the status table are as follows:
•
•
Status
Displays the current status of the network port.
Alarm
Displays the alarm value of the network port. The unit
declares an alarm as soon as the count exceeds the threshold
set.
•
Count
Displays the number of events or occurrences of this statistic
that have been detected.
•
Threshold
A read/write field that can be set to a desirable threshold.
The table provides error status and alarm threshold information for the
following error parameters:
3-8
WANsuite 5160/5130
ES
Sets the Errored Seconds (ES) threshold. An ES is a 1-second period in which
at least one logic error occurred. The default value is 45 seconds.
SES
Sets the Severely Errored Seconds (SES) threshold. An SES is a 1-second
period in which at least 320 CRC errors or one Out-of-Frame (OOF) error
occurred. The default value is 5 seconds.
LOSS
Sets the Loss of Signal Seconds (LOSS) threshold. A LOSS is a 1-second
period in which the T1 received signal is interrupted. The default value is 5
seconds.
UAS
Sets the Unavailable Seconds (UAS) threshold. A UAS is a 1-second period
in which consecutive severely errored seconds cause an unavailable state. The
default is 0 (zero) seconds (Disabled).
CSS
Sets the Controlled Slip Seconds (CSS) threshold. The default is 0 (zero)
seconds (Disabled).
BPVS
Sets the Bipolar Violation Errored Seconds (BPVS) threshold. A BPVS is a 1second period in which at least one bipolar violation occurred. The default is
0 (zero) seconds (Disabled).
OOFS
Sets the Out of Frame Seconds (OOFS) threshold. An OOFS is a 1-second
period in which a frame sync loss occurred. The default value is 5 seconds.
AISS
Sets the Alarm Indication Signal Seconds (AISS) threshold. An AIS is a 1second period when unframed all ones are received. The default is 0 (zero)
seconds (Disabled).
RAS
Sets the Remote Alarm Seconds (RAS) threshold. A RAS is generated by the
terminal equipment when an improper signal is received from the facility (or
upon receipt of unframed all ones). The default is 0 (zero) seconds (Disabled).
Reset Timer
Sets the Reset Timer threshold. This field is the contiguous number of
seconds that an alarm parameter must be clear before the alarm is reset.
Applicable values range from 000 through 900. A value of “000” means the
alarm will never be reset.
The Network screens provide the user-activated buttons described in the table
below.
Button
Function
Submit
Sets any values that have been changed.
Clear Alarms
Resets the alarm conditions and counts to zero.
Learn DS0s Now
Learns which DS0s are active and assigns them to the first
associated network service. Learned DS0s are based on the idle
pattern specified in the Channel Table (see below).
Web Server Interface
3-9
Button
Function
Performance
Displays a Performance/Summary screen that shows a current
count of the number of error events that have occurred over the
past 24 hours and the past 30 days.
Channels
Displays the Channel Table Details Screen on page 3-26,
showing each channel by index number. Each channel’s rate and
service (by number) are displayed and can be changed through
user input.
CAUTION: Performance data will be lost upon power cycle or after performing a
Maintenance Reset or a Save and Restart.
Figure 3.6
Network Performance/Summary Screen
In addition to the error parameters found in the Error Status and Alarm
Thresholds Table on page 3-8, the following error parameters are included on
the Network Performance/Summary table:
BES
A Bursty Error Second (BES) is a 1-second period during which at least more
than one but fewer than 320 CRC6 errors occurred.
LOFC
The Loss of Frame Count (LOFC) represents the number of time a loss of
frame is declared. A loss of frame is declared after 2.5 seconds of continuous
loss of signal or OOF.
CRCES
A Cyclic Redundancy Check Errored Second (CRCES) is a method of
confirming the integrity of received data.
Beneath the Performance/Summary table are two buttons: “Performance 24
Hour” and “Performance 30 Day.” Clicking either of these buttons will
display a detailed summary of the error events that have occurred during each
3-10
WANsuite 5160/5130
15-minute interval of the past 24 hours (Figure 3.7) or during each interval
(day) of the past 30 days (Figure 3.8).
Figure 3.7
Network Performance 24 Hour Screen
Figure 3.8
Network Performance 30 Day Screen
Serial Screens
The Serial 1 and Serial 2 screens on the WANsuite 5160 or Serial screen on
the WANsuite 5130 let you view and make changes to the unit’s Serial
interface configuration as described below. The parameters on all Serial
screens are the same except for the Invert Clock parameter, which is found
only on the Serial 2 screen; therefore, the WANsuite 5160 Serial 2 screen
(Figure 3.9) is the only one shown below.
Web Server Interface
3-11
Figure 3.9
Type
Serial 2 Screen
This parameter selects the type of interface (based on its electrical signal
characteristics) used by the equipment connected to the Serial port.
Values: V.35, RS-232, EIA-530
Default: V.35
NOTICE: V.35 requires the use of an optional cable. Refer to Optional Equipment
on page A-6 for ordering information.
Mode
By default, the Serial port serves as a DCE port in both Packet and TDM
modes. However, the Serial port can serve as a DTE port when the unit is in
Packet mode.
If the Serial port connects to a DTE device (such as a FRAD or a router), the
Mode parameter must be set to “DCE.” If this port connects to a DCE device
(such as a DSU/CSU), this parameter must be set to “DTE” (valid only for
Packet mode, not TDM).
Values: DCE, DTE
Default: DCE
NOTICE: DTE mode requires the use of an optional DTE cable. Refer to
Appendix A for ordering information.
Packet Rate
3-12
If the port is running in Packet mode, the Rate must be configured to the
desired port speed (in bits per second). In TDM mode, the port speed rate will
be set by configuring the next four parameters (Start Channel, Number of
Channels, Bundling, and Channel Rate).
Values: Nx56K or Nx64K where N = 1-32
Default: 1536 kbps
WANsuite 5160/5130
Bundling
Selects whether the DTE channel assignment is made as a “Contiguous”
group or as “Alternate” channels. Selecting “Alternate” ensures ones density.
Because the unit allows individual channels to be configured for a service, a
value of “Arbitrary” will be returned for this parameter if the current channel
allocation is not contiguous or Alternate. The “Arbitrary” value can only be
supplied by the unit − it cannot be set by the user.
Values: Contiguous, Alternate, Arbitrary
Default: Contiguous
NOTICE: Because “Alternate” Bundling assigns every other channel, only half
the channels are available.
Start Channel
Number of Channels
Channel Rate
Selects the starting channel in the 24-channel DS1 bit stream. Starting with
the specified channel, the unit automatically assigns the channels that follow.
Values: 1 through 24
Default: 1
Specifies the number of channels to be assigned to the DTE.
Values: 0 through 24
Default: 24 Channel Rate
The unit can operate at any data rate that is a multiple of 56 or 64 kbps. If
“Νx64K” is selected, the ones density requirements of the T1 network line
must be ensured. If “Νx56K” is selected, ones density for the selected DS0
channel is maintained.
Values: Nx56K, Nx64K
Default: Nx64K
NOTICE: Start Channel, Number of Channels, and Channel Rate cannot be
changed if Bundling is not also changed from “Arbitrary.”
Invert Clock
In DTE Packet mode, this parameter changes the clock edge of the
transmitted data. The Invert Clock parameter is only available for use in DTE
mode, and DTE mode is only available for the Serial 2 port. Consequently,
this configuration option only works for the Serial 2 port, and should remain
disabled when configuring services for the Serial 1 port.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
Character Size
Selects the number of bits required to make up one asynchronous character.
Values: Five, Six, Seven, Eight
Default: Eight
Tx Clock
Selects the clock the unit uses to sample the data transmitted from the DTE.
When set to “Internal,” the data is sampled directly with the transmit data
Web Server Interface
3-13
clock that is also supplied to the DTE as Transmit Clock. The “External”
option uses the external clock from the DTE.
Values: Internal, External
Default: Internal
NOTICE: The “External” option is valid only in Packet mode.
Format
Parity
Stop Bit
3-14
Selects the port’s operating mode.
Values: Sync, Async
Default: Sync
Sets the parity bit if the port is asynchronous.
Values: None, Odd, Even
Default: None
Selects the number of bits required to end the character.
Values: 1, 2
Default: 1
LL
The Local Loopback parameter can be set to “Enable” or “Disable.” Selecting
“Enable” allows the unit to go into Local Loop when the LL pin on the
Serial 1 port goes high. The unit exits the loop when the LL pin goes low. If
you select “Disable,” the unit ignores the LL pin on the Serial port.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
V.54
Selecting “Enable” allows the unit to respond to in-band V.54 loop codes. If
you select “Disable,” the unit ignores these codes.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
CTS
The Clear To Send parameter can be set to “Forced True,” “Forced False,” or
“Internal.” If this parameter is set to “Internal,” the CTS control lead follows
the RTS control lead from the DTE after a delay of a duration established by
the RTS/CTS Delay parameter.
Values: Forced True, Forced False, Internal
Default: Forced True
DSR
Data Set Ready can be set to “Forced True,” “Forced False,” or “Internal.”
The “Internal” option sets DSR “On” if the port is enabled and “Off” if the
port is disabled.
Values: Forced True, Forced False, Internal
Default: Forced True
DCD
The Data Carrier Detect parameter can be set to “Forced True,” “Forced
False,” or “Internal.” If set to “Internal,” DCD is “On” when network carrier
WANsuite 5160/5130
is being received from the remote end, and is “Off” when network carrier is
not being received from the far end.
Values: Forced True, Forced False, Internal
Default: Forced True
RTS
The Request To Send parameter determines the source from which the unit
reads the RTS signal status. If set to “Normal,” the unit gets RTS from the
DTE on the Serial interface. If set to “Forced True,” RTS is always perceived
as “On.”
Values: Normal, Forced True
Default: Normal
RTS/CTS Delay
The Request To Send/Clear To Send parameter determines how long the unit
waits before it changes the level of CTS to match RTS when the CTS
parameter is set to “Internal.”
Values: Normal (~30 ms delay), Long (~100 ms delay)
Default: Normal
Flow Control
Selects the type of flow control to be used if the port is asynchronous.
Values: None, Xon/Xoff, RTS/CTS
Default: None
Current Pin Status
The Current Pin Status, which shows the state of the RS-232 pins, is also
displayed on the Serial interface screens.
DTR Alarm Control and Status Table
In addition to the configurable fields, the Serial screen displays a table that
lets you set the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Alarm Control parameters and
view the current DTR Alarm Status.
Choices for DTR Alarm Control are “Enable” and “Disable”; the default
setting is “Disable.” Setting DTR Alarm Control to “Enable” allows the unit
to go into alarm on a loss of DTR, which occurs when the Serial port detects
that the DTR signal is low. The DTR Status field indicates the current state of
the DTR alarm.
To make changes to any Serial port parameter, simply set the parameter to the
desired selection and click the “Submit” button at the bottom of the screen.
10/100 Ethernet Screen (IP Service Details)
The 10/100 Ethernet (IP Service Details) screen (Figure 3.10) lets you
configure the IP parameters described below.
Web Server Interface
3-15
Figure 3.10 10/100 Ethernet (IP Service Details) Screen
Unit IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway IP Address
DHCP Client
A unique network address assigned to this unit.
Defines the network portion of the unit’s IP address.
IP address of the default gateway (router) on the LAN side of the unit.
If DHCP Client is enabled at power-up, the unit will request its IP, Mask, and
Gateway addresses from a DHCP server located on the LAN side of the unit,
and the unit will use these addresses. If the DHCP request is unsuccessful, the
unit will use the configured addresses shown on this screen.
NOTICE: Always verify that a DHCP server is available on the network before
enabling DHCP Client. If, on power-up, a DHCP server is not found, a
60-second timeout will occur.
Client Identifier
Ethernet
Physical Address
Displays a unique identifier for a specific IP address.
Enables or disables a remote unit’s Ethernet port.
Displays unique MAC address.
NOTICE: If you manually change the IP address, you must “Save and Restart.”
(See Save and Restart on page 3-4.) The first three address parameters
above can also be configured using the Installation Wizard on page 2-2.
To view details about the current condition of IP, ICMP (In and Out), TCP,
and UDP parameters, click the “Ethernet Stats” button at the bottom of the
screen. The Ethernet Statistics screen (Figure 3.11) contains no user-selectable
fields or options; it is simply a representation of the applicable MIB II
parameters.
3-16
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 3.11 Ethernet Statistics Screen
Click on the Unit Access Table button on the Ethernet (IP Details) screen to
view the Unit Access Table (Figure 3.12), which specifies up to 10 different
IP networks that may access the unit’s parameters. If no IP networks are
supplied, any host may access the unit. Select any Index number on the table
to view the Unit Access Details (Figure 3.13) that correspond with that Index
number.
Figure 3.12 Unit Access Table
Web Server Interface
3-17
Figure 3.13 Unit Access Details
Supervisory Screen
The Supervisory screen (Figure 3.14) displays the current speed of the
Supervisory port interface and other parameters as described below.
Figure 3.14 Supervisory Screen
Speed
Character Size
Diagnostic Messages
Changes the Supervisory port speed (in bits per second).
Values: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
Default: 19200
Selects the number of bits required to make up one asynchronous character.
Values: Five, Six, Seven, Eight
Default: Eight
Enables the Supervisory port to send out diagnostic messages upon power-up.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Enable
NOTICE: When in SCADA mode, these diagnostic messages disrupt the connected
device. Therefore, if using the SCADA mode, set this value to
“Disable.”.
3-18
WANsuite 5160/5130
NOTICE: Diagnostic Messages must be set to “Enable” for the Verilink
Configuration Wizard to work.
Parity
Stop Bit
Sets the parity bit.
Values: None, Odd, Even
Default: None
Selects the number of bits required to end the character.
Values: 1, 2
Default: 1
Current Pin Status
The Current Pin Status, which shows the state of the RS-232 pins, is also
displayed on the Supervisory interface screen.
DTR Alarm Control and Status Table
In addition to the configurable fields, the Supervisory screen displays a table
that lets you set the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Alarm Control parameters
and view the current DTR Alarm Status.
Choices for DTR Alarm Control are “Enable” and “Disable”; the default
setting is “Disable.” Setting DTR Alarm Control to “Enable” allows the unit
to go into alarm on a loss of DTR, which occurs when the Serial port detects
that the DTR signal is low. The DTR Status field indicates the current state of
the DTR alarm.
Services Screen
The Services screen (Figure 3.15) displays the unit’s defined services and the
Interface, Type, Pair, and Status parameters for each service.
Figure 3.15 Services Screen
The Status for a particular service will display as one of the following:
Web Server Interface
3-19
•
Dead − The service is not functional because required resources are not
available.
•
Changed − The service parameter was changed and a Save and Restart is
required for the service to function.
•
Down − The service is not able to pass data because the physical layer is
down.
•
Physical Up − The service is not able to pass data because it has not
completed any required negotiations.
•
•
Up − The service is ready to pass data.
Idle − The service has nothing to do.
The table in the center of the screen displays the available services listed by
index number. To view more detailed information about a service, click on
the index number associated with the desired service on the Services screen
and then click on one of the user-activated “Details” buttons on the Service
Details screen as described on page 3-22.
Data Line Monitor Configuration Table
Click on the Data Line Monitor Config Table button at the top of the Service
screen to view a screen that displays SCADA port information (Figure 3.16).
Figure 3.16 Data Line Monitor Config Table
Mode
Buffer Management
Displays whether displayed data is set to “Wrap” or “Stop on Full.”
Service
Indicates which service is being monitored.
Enable
Displays whether capture is Enabled or Disabled.
Tx/Rx Filter
Pattern Filter
Pattern
3-20
The two modes available are “Analyze” and “Live.” The Live mode lets you
capture data and create a usable text file of the captured data. In Analyze
mode, the packet switch will return the data via the Data Line Monitor Packet
Table (see Figure 3.17) whereas in the Live mode the Data Line Monitor
Packet Table will appear empty for SNMP calls.
Displays the direction of the captured data.
Displays the Enable/Disable status of the Packet Filter.
Displays which specific pattern is being searched for.
WANsuite 5160/5130
Pattern Mask
Displays the bits the unit is looking for.
Pattern Offset
Displays the offset in the packet that matches the pattern. If the offset is set to
255, the filter will search the packet for the pattern.
Click on the “Data Line Monitor Packet Table” button at the bottom of the
screen to view the table that displays the captured data. The screen shows
about 10 lines of active data, and if a line is selected, the screen will display
further decoded data below.
Figure 3.17 Data Line Monitor Packet Table
The Data Line Monitor Details screen (Figure 3.18) is displayed by clicking
the appropriate Services link on the Data Line Monitor Config Table screen.
You use this screen to define the parameters listed above.
Figure 3.18 Data Line Monitor Details Screen
Adding a Service
To add a service, begin by clicking the “Add Service” button on the Services
screen. A new service listed by the next incremental index number will appear
Web Server Interface
3-21
on screen. The Interface for the newly added service will be “Unassigned.” To
assign an interface for the new service, click on its index number, which will
take you to the Service Details screen described below.
NOTICE: Any changes to settings in the Service Table require a “Save and
Restart” for them to take effect.
Service Details Screen
Clicking on an index number under the “Service Index” column on the
Services screen will display a Service Details screen such as the one shown
below (Figure 3.19). (In this example, the selected service type is Frame
Relay.)
Figure 3.19 Service Details Screen
The Service Details screen lets you change for each service the parameters
listed below.
Parameter
Options
Interface
Unassigned, Supervisory, Network 1 or Network 2 (5160), Network
(5130), Serial 1 or Serial 2 (5160), Serial (5130), 10/100 Ethernet,
Virtual*
Type
TDM, PPP, Frame Relay, IP, tty, SCADA
Pair
User-assigned integer field that specifies where to route the traffic
from this Service. If the Service is terminated by the unit, set this
value to “0” (zero).
* PPP is the only service that may be attached to the Virtual interface. You would choose the
Virtual interface for PPP if you elected to run PPP over Frame Relay. When you attach PPP to
the Virtual interface, you must supply an endpoint over which to send PPP encapsulated data,
and that endpoint must be for a Frame Relay DLCI.
3-22
WANsuite 5160/5130
In addition, the Service Details screen provides the following user-activated
buttons:
Button
Function
Submit
Sets any values that have been changed.
Interface Details
Opens the Details screen for the Interface of the currently selected
service.
Type Details
Opens the Details screen for the Type of the currently selected
service.
Delete Service
Opens the Verify Delete Service screen.
Interface Details Button
Clicking the “Interface Details” button on the Service Details screen lets you
view interface parameters for the selected service. You will also see the
interface parameters for the selected service if you click on the interface under
the “Interface” column on the Services screen.
Type Details Button
Clicking the “Type Details” button on the Service Details screen lets you
view (and, in some cases, change) interface parameters for the specified
service. The details displayed depend on the type of service currently in effect
for the selected service. You will see this same screen if you click on the
service under the “Type” column on the Services screen. Type Details screens
for the various services are presented below.
Delete Service Button
Click the “Delete Service” button to remove the currently configured service
identified by the Service Details screen. Deleting the selected service will
remove all references to this service. These references may include frame
relay, DLCI, endpoint, and Service Aware configurations.
After clicking the “Delete Service” button, you will be presented with a
confirmation screen (Figure 3.20). Click the “Confirm Delete Service” button
to confirm the removal of the selected service. To cancel, simply invoke your
browser’s “Back” function.
Web Server Interface
3-23
Figure 3.20 Confirm Delete Service Screen
DS0 Monitor Details Screen (5160 Only)
To access the DS0 Monitor Details Screen (Figure 3.21), click on “TDM” in
the Type column on the Service Details screen. This screen lets you configure
what are considered high and low DS0 utilization parameters, and will report
alarms if the monitored statistics rise above or fall below those specified
settings. This helps determine customer load patterns so that channel
bandwidth can be reallocated as necessary.
Figure 3.21 DS0 Monitor Details Screen
Number of DS0s
3-24
Number of active DS0s (0−24) assigned on a per-service basis.
Alarm Reset Timer
(sec)
Number of seconds that an alarm condition must not be present before an
alarm is reset. Zero (0) indicates the Alarm Reset Timer is disabled.
Values: 0−900
Default: 30
High Utilization %
Lets you configure as a percent what is considered high utilization.
Values: 1−100
Default: 100
WANsuite 5160/5130
High Threshold (sec)
Lets you configure a high-utilization threshold (in seconds), above which an
alarm will report.
Values: 0−900
Default: 0 (Disabled)
End of Day Low
Utilization %
Lets you configure as a percent what is considered low utilization at the end
of the day. If the utilization is below this level when the day ends, an alarm
reports.
Values: 0−100
Default: 0 (Disabled)
DS0 Status and Alarm Table
Each second, the TDM services will count the number of active DS0s and
update their statistics. This table also gives the status of the alarms (OK,
Alarmed) related to DS0s.
The user-activated buttons listed below are at the bottom of the DS0 Monitor
Details screen.
Button
Function
Submit
Sets any values that have been changed.
Clear Alarms
Clears all utilization alarms.
Channels
Displays the Channel Table details (Figure 3.22) for the
Network, Network 1, or Network 2 service
DS0 24 Hour History
Displays DS0 monitor history in 15-min buckets for the past
24 hours (Figure 3.23).
DS0 30 Day History
Displays DS0 monitor history in 24-hr buckets for the past 30
days (Figure 3.24).
Web Server Interface
3-25
Figure 3.22 Channel Table Details Screen
The Channel Table Details screen lets you establish the Rate, Service, and
Idle Pattern parameters for any available channel. The screen parameters are
described below.
Rate
Service
Idle Pattern
The unit can operate at any data rate that is a multiple of 56 or 64 kbps.
Values: 56K, 64K
Default: 64K
Specifies the service to which this channel is allocated. Refer to the Service
Table to see how the current services are configured.
Selects the DS0 idle pattern sent by the unit and lets the unit determine if the
DS0 idle pattern has been sent by the other end.
Values: 0−FF (Hex)
Default: 7F
Figure 3.23 DS0 Monitor 24 Hour History Screen
3-26
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 3.24 DS0 Monitor 30 Day History Screen
The DS0 Monitor 24 Hour History and 30 Day History screens show the
following statistics for the specified period.
Period
Period for which the DS0 monitor history is displayed.
Timestamp
System-up-time value during which the utilization historical period was
completed.
% Utilization of DS0(s)
Percent of DS0s utilized (−1, 0−100) over the period. A −1 indicates an
invalid value or unavailable data.
High Utilization (sec)
Number of seconds (0−900) greater than or equal to the high utilization
parameter specified for the period in the utilization alarm table.
A “Clear History” button is also included on the 24 Hour and 30 Day History
screens.
Frame Relay Service Details Screen
Click on “Frame Relay” under the “Type” column on the Services screen to
access the Frame Relay Service Details screen (Figure 3.25). This screen lets
you access the configuration parameters described in the paragraphs below.
Web Server Interface
3-27
Figure 3.25 Frame Relay Service Details Screen
Interface Type
If this service is connected to a Frame Relay network, the Interface Type
should be set to “UNI” as it is the user side of a User-to-Network interface. If
it is connected to a FRAD/Router, the Interface Type should be set to “NI” as
it is the network side of a User-to-Network interface. If it is connected to an
equipment set for Network-to-Network interface, the Interface Type should be
set to “NNI.”
Values: UNI, NI, NNI
Default: UNI if interface is Network, NI if interface is Serial
Link Management
This parameter should be set to the link management used by the equipment
connected to it. If set to “Auto,” the unit will learn the link management type
and display it on the status portion of this screen.
Once it discovers the link management type, the unit should be set to the
discovered value so that subsequent unit or network re-initialization will be
faster.
Values: Auto, ANSI, CCITT, LMI, None
Default: ANSI
Max Frame Size
3-28
If Auto Diagnostic is set to “Yes,” the unit will discard received frames that
are larger than the maximum frame size. If Auto Diagnostic is set to “No,”
these large received frames will be sent, but will be counted in the Rx Invalid
statistics.
Values: 64–4096
Default: 2500
WANsuite 5160/5130
N1
This counter indicates the number of “keep alive” status inquiries that are sent
between full status requests.
Values: 5–255
Default: 5 if interface is Network (UNI), 6 if interface is Serial (NI).
N2
The N2 counter specifies the total number of link reliability errors and
protocol errors that can occur during the sliding event monitor count defined
by N3. If this count is exceeded, the port is declared inactive.
Values: 1–255
Default: 3
N3
This counter represents a Monitored Events Count. For a network, a
monitored event is the receipt of a status inquiry message or the expiration of
the polling verification timer T2. For a FRAD, a monitored event is the
transmission of a status enquiry message. This parameter defines the size of
the sliding window used by the unit to determine whether a channel or user
device is active.
Values: 5–255
Default: 4
T1
This parameter specifies the number of seconds the unit waits between issuing
status inquiry messages.
Values: 5–30
Default: 10
RFC1315 Trap
Normal Tx Queue Size
When this parameter is set to “Enable,” the unit will send the standard
RFC1315 frame relay DTE circuit state change trap every time a DLCI
changes state, provided at least one destination IP address for trap is
configured in the SNMP configuration.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
Each Frame Relay service has two distinct transmit queues: one for normalpriority traffic and one for high-priority traffic. At this time, only SCADA and
TCP Server traffic are considered high-priority and are placed in the highpriority queue. All other types of traffic are placed in the normal-priority
queue.
This parameter defines how many normal priority frames can be put in front
of a high-priority frame. The sofware always checks for high-priority frames
before placing normal-priority frames in the transmit queue. However, once
the frames are in the hardware transmit queue, their order of transmission
cannot be changed.
If SCADA and/or TCP Server are not up, set this parameter to 28 (the
default). If SCADA and/or TCP Server are up, set this parameter according to
the SCADA host system’s ability to support higher latency. For example, if a
SCADA host system has a timeout of 500 ms when polling remote devices
through a DDS Frame Relay service, the Normal Tx Queue Size parameter
should be set to 2. This would allow two 1500-byte IP frames to be sent
Web Server Interface
3-29
between SCADA frames without reaching the 500-ms limit. If the SCADA
host application has a timeout lower than 500 ms, this parameter should be set
to 1. This then ensures a minimum latency for SCADA applications.
However, it will slow IP traffic since only one IP frame at a time can be
placed in the hardware transmit queue.
Default CIR (bps)
This is the Committed Information Rate (in bits per second) provided by your
frame relay service provider. The unit will apply this value to each DLCI
learned from the network side to gather statistics and to perform CIR
enforcement, if required. If a DLCI is configured with a CIR different from
the default, the DLCI configuration will be used instead.
Values: 0–1536000
Default: 0
Default Be Rate (bps)
This is the Excess Burst Rate (in bits per second) provided by your frame
relay service provider. The unit will apply this value to each DLCI learned
from the network side to gather statistics and to perform CIR enforcement, if
required. If a DLCI is configured with a different Excess Burst from the
default, the DLCI configuration will be used instead.
Values: 0–1536000
Default: 0
Enforce CIR and Be
If this parameter is set to “Yes,” the unit will enforce Committed Information
Rate and Excess Burst.
Values: No, Yes
Default: No
NOTICE: The Auto Diagnostic parameter must be set to “Yes” to enforce CIR and
Be.
Management DLCI
If there is a DLCI entered (and submitted) in this field, it will be the only
DLCI that looks for in-band management packets. If a value of “0” (zero) is
entered in this field, all DLCIs will look for management packets.
Management Auto IP
DLCI
If this parameter is set to “Yes,” the unit will monitor the specified
management DLCI for 5 pings over 5 seconds, after which the unit uses the
destination address as its management IP address.
FrameStart Auto
Diagnostic
When this parameter is set to “Yes,” the unit will always source LMI on both
sides of the frame relay connection. The unit will dynamically learn the type
of link management used on each side of the connection (Network and
Serial).
When set to “No,” the unit will monitor LMI between the Serial and the
Network port. If one side of the connection goes down, it will source LMI
until the connection goes back up, and will automatically go back to Monitor
mode once both sides are up. In Monitor mode, the unit will switch all frames
received between the network and the serial port regardless of the number of
DLCIs or frame size.
3-30
WANsuite 5160/5130
FrameStart Auto Diagnostic mode should be left set to “Yes” unless the frame
relay connection has more that 128 DLCIs, or if there is a very high traffic
rate on a constant basis.
Values: No, Yes
Default: Yes
NOTICE: If either side of the Frame Relay connection goes down, you will be
unable to remotely access any connected units.
FrameStart Auto
Discovery
When this parameter is set to “Yes,” the unit will send FrameStart discovery
and delay frames to each DLCI it learns as soon as the DLCIs are set active.
This is required to calculate round trip delay as well as to discover remote
WANsuite 5160/5130/FST/FSD units. This parameter should be set to “Yes”
only on network services that have a WANsuite 5160/5130/FST/FSD at the
far end of the frame relay connection. Also if set to “Yes,” the unit will gather
SLA parameters such as frame and data delivery ratio as defined in the Frame
Relay Forum Implementation, FRF.13. Those gathered statistics are then
displayed on the DLCI Statistics screen as shown on page 3-49.
Values: No, Yes
Default: No
Round Trip Delay Size
(bytes)
Specifies the frame size (in bytes) of packets making the round-trip.
Round Trip Delay Rate
(secs)
Specifies the rate (in seconds) at which Round Trip Delay packets are sent.
Status and Alarms Table
The table displayed at the bottom of the Frame Relay Service Details screen
reports on the status and condition of LMI parameters and on Receive/
Transmit alarms and thresholds. Alarm threshold levels may be changed by
entering a new threshold value in the appropriate field of the table and
clicking the “Submit” button. Table fields are described below.
Active
Read-only field shows whether or not (Yes or No) an alarm is active.
LMI Type
Read-only status indicates ANSI, CCITT, LMI rev. 1, or Unknown.
FrameStart Status
Rx Invalid Threshold
Rx Invalid Alarm
Tx Threshold
Read-only status indicates Sourcing, Monitoring, or 0.
Number of invalid frames received during a 15-minute interval after which an
invalid alarm will be triggered. Default of “0” disables this alarm.
Status of this alarm indicates OK or Alarmed.
Number of bits per second sent during a 15-minute interval after which a Tx
alarm will be triggered. Default of 0 disables this alarm.
Web Server Interface
3-31
Tx Alarm
Rx Threshold
Rx Alarm
Status of this alarm indicates OK or Alarmed.
Number of bits per second sent during a 15-minute interval after which an Rx
alarm will be triggered. Default of 0 disables this alarm.
Status of this alarm indicates OK or Alarmed.
The Frame Relay Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:
Button
Function
Submit
Sets any values that have been changed.
Frame Relay Statistics
Opens the Frame Relay Port Statistics screen for the current
Frame Relay service.
DLCI Table
Opens the DLCI Table screen, which displays all the DLCIs
on the current service. Refer to DLCI Table Screen on
page 3-50 for more information.
Clear Alarms
Clears all Frame Relay alarms.
NOTICE: When a “Submit” command is executed, the Frame Relay link will be
re-initialized with the new parameters, causing a brief interruption in
data transfer.
Frame Relay Port Statistics Screen
Clicking the “Frame Relay Statistics” button brings up a table (Figure 3.26)
that reports on the status and condition of LMI parameters and on Receive/
Transmit alarms and thresholds. Alarm threshold levels may be changed by
entering a new threshold value in the appropriate field on the Frame Relay
Service Details screen and clicking the “Submit” button.
3-32
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 3.26 Frame Relay Port Statistics Screen
Transmit
Frames
Number of frames transmitted by the port.
Octets
Number of octets transmitted by the port.
Mgmt Frames
Number of management frames transmitted by the port.
Mgmt Octets
Number of management octets transmitted by the port.
Stat Inquiries
Number of octets transmitted in frame relay LMI status inquiries.
Stat Responses
Number of octets transmitted in frame relay LMI status responses.
Receive
Frames
Number of frames received by the port.
Octets
Number of octets received by the port.
Mgmt Frames
Number of management frames received by the port.
Mgmt Octets
Number of management octets received by the port.
FECN
Number of Forward Explicit Congestion Notification frames received.
BECN
Number of Backward Explicit Congestion Notification frames received.
Invalids
Stat Inquiries
Number of invalid frames received.
Number of octets received in frame relay LMI status inquiries.
Web Server Interface
3-33
Stat Responses
Invalid LMIs
Number of octets received in frame relay LMI status responses.
Number of invalid Local Management Interface frames received.
Throughput (bits/sec)
Peak
Average
Period Index
Peak bandwidth (in bps) as measured over a 10-second period.
Average bandwidth (in bps) used by the port.
Selects the interval (Current, Summary, or 1-96) to be viewed on the Frame
Relay Port Statistics screen.
The Frame Relay Port Statistics screen provides the following user-activated
buttons:
Button
Function
Submit
Sets any values that have been changed.
All Frame Relay
Intervals
Opens the Frame Relay Statistics screen that shows all statistics
for all parameters.
Type Details
Returns you to the Frame Relay Service Details screen.
Clear Stats
Clears all Frame Relay statistics.
SCADA Details Screen
NOTICE: SCADA traffic has a higher priority than other types of traffic flowing
through the unit. Refer to Normal Tx Queue Size on page 3-29 for more
details.
Click on “SCADA” under the “Type” column on the Services screen to view
the SCADA Details screen (Figure 3.27). This menu gives you access to the
configuration parameters described in the paragraphs below.
Figure 3.27 SCADA Details Screen
3-34
WANsuite 5160/5130
Message Size
Idle Character Delay
Input Terminator
Data Direction
SCADA Loopback
Maximum number of characters to buffer before sending a frame.
Values: 0−1024
Default: 256
Maximum number of idle character time to wait before sending a frame.
Values: 0−65535
Default: 10
Decimal value of the character that terminates a message before sending a
frame.
Values: 0−255
Default: 0
Data direction that the port will support. If set to “Input,” the port will only
accept incoming data and will not transmit data. If set to “Output,” the port
will ignore any incoming data. If set to “Both,” the port will process all data.
Values: Input, Output, Both
Default: Both
Determines if and where SCADA will loopback received data.
Values: None, Loopback to Network, Loopback to Port
Default: None
The table below these parameters displays the SCADA statistics.
The SCADA Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:
Button
Function
Submit
Sets any values that have been changed.
SCADA Device List
Displays a table that shows the mapping between
SCADA devices and endpoints (Figure 3.28).
Clear SCADA Statistics
Clears all SCADA statistics.
Figure 3.28 SCADA Device List Screen
Select the appropriate numbered link under the “Device column to access the
SCADA Device Details screen(Figure 3.29) where you can map SCADA
devices to endpoints.
Web Server Interface
3-35
Figure 3.29 SCADA Device Details Screen
PPP Service Details Screen
Click on “PPP” under the “Type” column on the Services screen to view the
PPP Service Details screen (Figure 3.30). This menu gives you access to the
configuration parameters described in the paragraphs below.
Figure 3.30 PPP Service Details Screen
ACCM
3-36
The Asynchronous Control Character Map (ACCM) configuration option
provides a method to negotiate the use of control character transparency on
asynchronous links.
Values: 0–FFFFFFFF (Hex)
Default: FFFFFFFF
WANsuite 5160/5130
MRU
The Maximum Receive Units configuration option may be set to inform the
peer that the implementation can receive larger packets, or to request that the
peer send smaller packets.
Values: 128–4096
Default: 1500
Port IP Address
The IP Address of the port. For unnumbered PPP link, set to 0.0.0.0 and set
IP Address Negotiation to “No.”
Default: 192.168.1.2
Peer IP Address
The IP address of the peer that will negotiate authentication protocols.
Default: 192.168.1.3
Virtual PPP over
Endpoint name over which to send PPP encapsulated data (i.e., PPP over
Frame Relay). Valid only when the PPP interface is Virtual.
Auth Challenge
Interval
The time interval (in seconds) between CHAP challenges. A value of “0”
(zero) disables the periodic authentication challenge.
Values: 0−3600
Default: 0 (disabled)
Initiate Negotiation
Allow PAP
Allow CHAP
Determines whether the port actively negotiates with the peer site or passively
waits for negotiation requests.
Values: Yes, No
Default: Yes
Lets the peer to negotiate for PAP.
Values: No, Yes
Default: No
Lets the peer to negotiate for CHAP.
Values: No, Yes
Default: No
PAP Username
This field is used to log on to the peer. Type the appropriate PAP Username
in this field.
Values: User established
Default: Username
PAP Password
Enter the password necessary to log on to the peer under a given PAP
Username.
Values: User established
Default: None
CHAP Username
Type the appropriate CHAP Hostname in this field.
Values: User established
Default: Hostname
Web Server Interface
3-37
CHAP Secret
Enter the Secret (i.e., password) necessary to challenge the peer.
Values: User established
Default: Secret
Parameters To Negotiate
The table displayed near the bottom of the PPP Service Details screen shows
which parameters are set to be negotiated. You can specify which parameters
should be negotiated by clicking on the pull-down menu next to each
parameter and selecting the desired option. Parameters that can be negotiated
are described below.
Parameter
Description
Protocol Header
Compression
Compresses PPP protocol headers.
Default = Yes
IPCP (IP Control
Protocol)
Compression
Compresses TCP headers using Van Jacobsen compression.
Default = Yes
MRU (Maximum
Receive Units)
Informs the peer that the implementation can receive larger
packets, or to request that the peer send smaller packets.
Default = Yes
HDLC Address
Compression
Provides a method to negotiate the compression of high-level
data link control (HDLC) addresses.
Default = Yes
IP Address
Dynamically negotiates for IP addresses; otherwise, it is
assumed both sides know each other’s IP addresses.
Default = Yes
ACCM
Negotiates the use of control character transparency on
asynchronous links.
Default = Yes
Magic Number
Unique numbers useful for detecting loopbacks.
Default = Yes
PAP (Password
Authentication
Protocol)
An authentication scheme used by PPP servers to validate the
identity of the originator of the connection.
Default = No
CHAP (ChallengeHandshake
Authentication
Protocol)
An authentication scheme used by PPP servers to validate the
identity of the originator of the connection upon connection or
any time later.
Default = No
PPP Statistics
Clicking the “PPP Statistics” button brings up a table (Figure 3.26) that reports
on traffic.
3-38
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 3.31 PPP Statistics Screen
Transmit
Frames
Number of frames transmitted by the port.
Octets
Number of octets transmitted by the port.
Mgmt Frames
Number of management frames transmitted by the port.
Mgmt Octets
Number of management octets transmitted by the port.
Receive
Frames
Number of frames received by the port.
Octets
Number of octets received by the port.
Mgmt Frames
Number of management frames received by the port.
Mgmt Octets
Number of management octets received by the port.
Invalids
Number of invalid frames received.
Throughput (bits/sec)
Peak
Average
Period Index
Peak bandwidth (in bps) as measured over a 10-second period.
Average bandwidth (in bps) used by the port.
Selects the interval (Current, Summary, or 1-96) to be viewed on the PPP
Statistics screen.
Web Server Interface
3-39
The PPP Statistics screen provides the following user-activated buttons:
Button
Function
Submit
Sets any values that have been changed.
All PPP Intervals
Opens the PPP Stats screen that shows all statistics for all parameters.
Type Details
Returns you to the PPP Service Details screen.
Clear Stats
Clears all PPP statistics.
PAP Table
At the bottom of the PPP Services Details screen are two buttons that display
tables for PAP and CHAP details. The PAP Table (Figure 3.32) displays the
Usernames and Passwords for 10 entries.
Figure 3.32 PAP Table Screen
Select an Index number and click the “PAP Details” button at the bottom of
this screen to bring up a PAP Details screen (Figure 3.33) in which you can
view, change, or delete the Username and Password for that particular PAP
Index.
Figure 3.33 PAP Details Screen
To change the Username and Password for a selected PAP Index (PAP: 1 in
the example above), enter the new information in the appropriate fields and
click the “Submit” button.
3-40
WANsuite 5160/5130
To delete the Username and Password for a selected PAP Index, delete the
character string displayed in both fields (leaving them blank) and click the
“Submit” button.
The “Type Details” button returns you to the PPP Type Details screen.
CHAP Table
From the PPP Service Details screen, click the “CHAP Table” button to view
a table (Figure 3.34) of the CHAP Username and Secret information for each
of 10 entries.
Figure 3.34 CHAP Table Screen
Select an Index number and click the “CHAP Details” button at the bottom of
this screen to bring up a screen in which you can change the Username and
Secret for that particular CHAP Index.
Figure 3.35 CHAP Details Screen
To change the Username and Secret for a selected CHAP Index, enter the new
information in the appropriate fields and click the “Submit” button.
The “Type Details” button returns you to the PPP Type Details screen.
IP Service Details Screen
The IP Service Details screen and Ethernet Stats screens are described earlier
in this chapter on in page 3-16 and page 3-17, respectively.
Web Server Interface
3-41
Applications
The Applications screens describe configuration tables and statistics for
Layer 3 and above that do not map to a specific service or interface.
Endpoint Table Screen
The Endpoint Table (Figure 3.36) describes all endpoints terminating in the
unit; links are provided to view the Endpoint Details, Endpoint Service
Details, and Endpoint DLCI Details screens. The unit will automatically learn
all DLCIs from the Network side and relay that information on the Serial side
with default values.
The Endpoint Table and its corresponding DLCIs will be saved in the
configuration database only after at least one endpoint parameter has been
changed and submitted in the Endpoint Details screen (page 3-42).
NOTICE: The Endpoint Table and its corresponding DLCIs will be saved in the
configuration database only after at least one endpoint parameter has
been changed and submitted in the Endpoint Details Screen on
page 3-43. When in IP Gateway, if you decide to use a “discovered”
endpoint, you must rename it. A discovered endpoint cannot be used
elsewhere (i.e., IP Gateway) until it has been renamed. Also, it will not
be saved in the configuration database.
NOTICE: Endpoint names of the form PPP-Sn and SCADA-Sn are reserved by the
system. These system-generated endpoints cannot be modified.
Figure 3.36 Endpoint Table Screen
For most applications, you will not have to modify the Endpoint Table and
DLCI Table. Modification is necessary, however, to configure remote in-band
management. (See In Band Management on page 3-46.)
Endpoint Details Screen
The Endpoint Details screen (Figure 3.37), which you access by clicking on
an Index number on the Endpoint Table, lets you access the configuration
parameters described in the paragraphs below.
3-42
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 3.37 Endpoint Details Screen
Name
When the unit learns a new DLCI, it creates an endpoint entry and a DLCI
entry if they are not already configured. The endpoint’s Name will
automatically be assigned as “Dynamic”; however, this name can (and most
likely should) be changed to reflect a remote location name. Submitting a
changed Name parameter will cause the endpoint entry and its corresponding
DLCI entry to be saved in the configuration database.
Value: A string of up to 11 characters
Default: None
CAUTION: When configuring endpoints, the name you assign each endpoint in
the Name parameter field must be unique within the unit.
Service
DLCI
Forward Endpoint
The Service Index number (from the Service Table) on which this DLCI was
found or configured.
Values: Displays the currently active Services (by index number) or the
Service(s) on which the DLCI was discovered.
Default: 0
The DLCI number.
Values: 16–1023
Default: 0
By default, each DLCI is switched to its pair service in the Service Table
using the same DLCI number. If this endpoint has to be switched to a
different DLCI or a different service, the endpoint index of the destination
must be configured here.
For most applications, you will not need to set this parameter.
Values: 0–256
Default: 0
Web Server Interface
3-43
Backup Endpoint
If this DLCI has an alternative endpoint to switch to in case this DLCI
becomes inactive, you would configure the endpoint index of this alternative
endpoint here.
For most applications, you will not need to set this parameter.
Values: 0–256
Default: 0
SLP Reference
Endpoint
This is the reference endpoint index to use for the SLA parameters. As most
applications have the same SLAs for all DLCIs, they need to be configured in
only one DLCI entry. All SLA parameters can then be copied from the
endpoint index of this configured DLCI. If no SLP reference endpoint is
configured and the DLCI SLA parameters are not configured, the values in
the Frame Relay Service Details will be used (default CIR, Be, enforcement).
For most applications, you will not need to set this parameter.
Values: 0–256
Default: 0
Remote IP Address
If this WANsuite 5160/5130 unit is to be used to manage a remote
WANsuite 5160/5130 unit, the IP address of the remote WANsuite 5160/5130
unit must be configured here. This DLCI can be used for management only,
or for management and actual data.
If this parameter is set, a PC connected to the LAN interface of this
WANsuite 5160/5130 can reach a remote WANsuite 5160/5130 through this
DLCI. The remote IP address must be part of an IP network that is different
from the local WANsuite 5160/5130, and the local WANsuite 5160/5130's IP
address must be configured into the PC. This way, local and remote
WANsuite 5160/5130s can be reached regardless of the availability of the
routers connected at the back of the WANsuite 5160/5130s.
Values: IP address
Default: 0.0.0.0
Remote IP Mask
Type
New DLCI
3-44
If the Remote IP Address is set, the Remote IP Mask must also be set.
Values: IP address
Default: 0.0.0.0
If data received from this DLCI has to be switched to its corresponding
destination port, the type must be set to “Switched.” The type should be set to
“Local” for any DLCI that is used for management purposes only.
Values: Switched, Local
Default: Switched
This field is used to create a new DLCI if it is not already configured. To
create a new DLCI, enter a valid DLCI number in the field and click the
“Submit” button. The new DLCI number will be reflected in the DLCI field
of the Endpoint Details screen.
WANsuite 5160/5130
The Endpoint Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:
Button
Function
Submit
Sets any values that have been changed.
Service Details
Opens the Service details screen showing the selected service's
settings.
DLCI Details
Displays details of the selected DLCI.
Delete Endpoint
Deletes the currently displayed endpoint.
Endpoint Service Details Screen
Clicking on the “Service Details” button at the bottom of the Endpoint Table
screen displays the typical Service Details screen. Refer to Service Details
Screen on page 3-22 for a complete description of this type of screen.
DLCI Details Screen
The DLCI Details screen (Figure 3.38) lets you access the configuration
parameters described in the paragraphs below. To bring up this screen, click
on a specific DLCI under the “DLCI” column on the Endpoint Table screen,
or on the “DLCI Details” button on the Endpoint Details screen.
Figure 3.38 DLCI Details Screen
The unit uses the first three configuration parameters (Protocol Encapsulation,
Proprietary Traffic Type, and Proprietary Offset) to gather statistics. For inband management, “RFC 1490” must be the encapsulation method.
Protocol Encapsulation
Type of encapsulation used by the FRAD/Router connected to the unit.
Values: RFC 1490, Proprietary
Default: RFC 1490
Web Server Interface
3-45
Proprietary Traffic
Type
When Protocol Encapsulation is set for “Proprietary,” the Proprietary Traffic
Type parameter defines which protocol is encapsulated.
Values: IP, IPX, Ethertype, None
Default: None
Proprietary Offset
When Protocol Encapsulation is set for “Proprietary,” the Proprietary Offset
parameter defines the number of octets after the frame relay header where the
proprietary traffic type starts.
Values: 0–64
Default: 0
CIR (bps)
If a Committed Information Rate is configured here, its value will be used
instead of the default CIR of the Frame Relay service.
Values: 0–1536000
Default: 0
Be (bps)
If an Excess Burst Rate is configured here, its value will be used instead of
the default excess burst of the Frame Relay service.
Values: 0–1536000
Default: 0
Bc (bps)
If CIR enforcement is configured to “Yes,” the unit will throttle the
committed burst down to this value when frames are received with the BECN
bit set.
Values: 0–1536000
Default: 0
Discard Eligible Flag
If this parameter is set to “Yes” and CIR enforcement is also set to “Yes,” the
unit will set the Discard Eligible (DE) bit for frames sent over CIR.
Values: Yes, No
Default: No
In Band Management
If the unit is to be used as a gateway to reach a remote WANsuite 5160/5130
through this DLCI, this parameter should be set to “Yes,” and the remote IP
address and Mask should be configured in the corresponding endpoint.
Values: Yes, No
Default: No
FrameStart Delay
If this parameter is set to “Enable,” the unit will send FrameStart discovery
and delay frames on this DLCI, and will report the state of the remote
Verilink unit with FrameStart technology. It will also send SOS frames when
the FRAD/router connected to this unit goes inactive.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Enable if Auto Discovery is set to “Yes”; Disable otherwise
FrameStart Status
If the remote unit is a Verilink unit with FrameStart technology and
FrameStart Auto Discovery is enabled, the FrameStart Status field will show
the status of the remote unit. The status is “Active” if both the local and
remote DLCIs are active and the remote unit answers to the discovery frames
3-46
WANsuite 5160/5130
sent by this unit. The status is “SOS” if the remote unit is active but the
FRAD/Router connected to it is inactive. The status is “Inactive” in all other
cases.
Values: Active, Inactive, SOS
Default: Inactive
Remote DLCI
Remote Unit
Remote Unit IP
Address
If the remote unit is a Verilink unit with FrameStart technology, and
FrameStart Auto Discovery is enabled, this displays the DLCI number used
on the remote end of this DLCI.
Values: 16−1023
Default: 0
If the remote unit is a Verilink unit with FrameStart technology, and
FrameStart Auto Discovery is enabled, this parameter gives the first three
digits of the unit ID configured on the remote end of this DLCI.
Values: 000−999
Default: 000
Displays the IP address of the remote Verilink unit with FrameStart
technology if FrameStart Auto Discovery is enabled.
Round Trip Delay Size
(bytes)
Specifies the frame size (in bytes) of packets making the round-trip. If the
Round Trip Delay Size is not configured, the Frame Relay Details values will
be used.
Round Trip Delay Rate
(secs)
Specifies the rate (in seconds) at which Round Trip Delay packets are sent. If
the Round Trip Delay Rate is not configured, the Frame Relay Details values
will be used.
DLCI Status Table
The bottom portion of the screen displays a table detailing the actual status of
DLCI and alarm threshold information as follows:
Status
If this DLCI is up, the status will be “Active”; otherwise, the status will be
“Inactive.”
Values: Active, Inactive
Default: Inactive
Receiving FECN/
BECN
When a frame is received with congestion bit set, this parameter is set to
“Yes.” It is set back to “No” when a frame is received without congestion bit
set.
Values: Yes, No
Default: No
CIR Threshold
Sets the Tx over CIR alarm threshold. This threshold is the number of bits per
second in excess of CIR during a 15-minute interval. Setting this field to “0”
(zero) disables the alarm.
Web Server Interface
3-47
CIR Alarm
Bits Over Be Threshold
Bits Over Be Alarm
Congestion Threshold
Congestion Alarm
BECN in CIR
UAS Threshold
UAS Alarm
Reports if the Tx over CIR threshold has been exceeded.
Sets the Tx over Be alarm threshold. This threshold is the number of bits per
second in excess of CIR + Be during a 15-minute interval. Setting this field to
“0” (zero) disables the alarm.
Reports if the Tx over Be threshold has been exceeded.
Sets the Rx Congestion alarm threshold. This threshold is the number of
frames received with BECN/FECN. Setting this field to “0” (zero) disables
the alarm.
Reports if the Rx Congestion threshold has been exceeded.
Reports if Backward Explicit Congestion Notification (BECN) has been
received within CIR.
Sets the Unavailable Seconds (UAS) alarm threshold. This threshold occurs
after the DLCI is unavailable for a specified number of seconds. Setting this
field to “0” (zero) disables the alarm.
Reports if the UAS threshold has been exceeded.
The DLCI Details screen provides the user-activated buttons defined below.
Button
Function
Submit
Sets and activates newly defined DLCI parameters.
Clear Alarms
Clears all DLCI alarms.
DLCI Statistics
Displays a table of the statistics for this DLCI.
DLCI Table
Displays a table of all DLCIs on a specific frame relay service, with
their state and alarm conditions.
DLCI Statistics Screen
Clicking the “DLCI Statistics” button on the DLCI Details screen will display
a summary (Figure 3.39) of the Transmit, Receive, and Performance statistics
for the selected DLCI for a specific period.
3-48
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 3.39 DLCI Statistics Screen
There are ninety-six 15-minute buckets (sampled every second) available for
DLCI statistics. If the unit is powered on at 01:00 PM, the first interval will
be completed at 01:15 PM; subsequent intervals would be completed at xx:30,
xx:45, xx:00 and xx:15. Interval 1 is always the latest (most recent) interval,
and interval 96 will always be the oldest.
The DLCI Statistics screen in the preceding figure shows a summary that
includes all 96 buckets. You can choose to see the statistics for any given
bucket by selecting the desired Period Index from the pull-down menu and
clicking the “Submit” button. Alternatively, you can display all intervals at
once by clicking the “All DLCI Intervals” button beneath the table. The MIB
(ipadv2.mib) describes each available statistic. “FDR” on the screen above
refers to Frame Delivery Ratio, which is the ration of successful frame
receptions to attempted frame transmissions. “DDR” refers to Data Delivery
Ratio or the ratio of successful payload bytes received to attempted payload
bytes transmitted. “DE,” or Discard Eligible, refers to the data that is first
eligible to be discarded when network congestion occurs.
DLCI Table Screen
Clicking the “DLCI Table” button on the DLCI Details screen will display a
table of all DLCIs (Figure 3.40) on a specific frame relay service along with
their state and alarm conditions.
Web Server Interface
3-49
Figure 3.40 DLCI Table Screen
NOTICE: The DLCI Table and DLCI Details screens are available from both the
Endpoint Table and the Frame Relay Service Details screens.
Service Aware Screen
The Service Aware function recognizes IP traffic and counts the number of
frames and bytes passed for a specific service based on filters by DLCI, by IP
Address, and by IP Port. Each row of the Service Aware table represents a
specific set of filter parameters known as a “rule.” Each rule is established
through the Rule Details screen, which is accessed by clicking on
theappropriate numbered link under the “Index column on the Service Aware
screen.
The Service Aware screen (Figure 3.41) provides a table showing these
filtered packet counts for up to 10 rules. This table indicates which Service
Aware filters are enabled or disabled, and shows the specific DLCI, IP
Address, and IP Port by which the IP traffic is filtered. In addition, this table
shows the Tx Alarm Threshold and the current Tx Alarm status (if enabled)
for each rule.
It is also possible to filter PPP services, in which case all information related
to DLCIs is ignored.
3-50
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 3.41 Service Aware Screen
NOTICE: If you change the Service parameter, you must click on “Submit” to see
the appropriate DLCIs.
The Service Aware screen provides a “Clear Alarms” user-activated button at
the bottom of the screen.
Rule Details Screen
Use the Rule Details screen (Figure 3.42) to establish Service Aware
parameters. To access the screen, click on the appropriate number under the
“Index” column on the Service Aware screen. To establish a rule, you must
select the desired rule configuration options and provide the appropriate filter
information where required. Then press the “Submit” button at the bottom of
the screen.
Web Server Interface
3-51
Figure 3.42 Rule Details Screen
The paragraphs below describe the Rule Details screen parameters and their
options.
Service
Selects the service to which the rule applies. Select from a pull-down list of
available services.
NOTICE: If you change the Service parameter, you must click on “Submit” to see
the appropriate DLCIs.
DLCI
Filter By DLCI
Selects the DLCI to which the rule applies from a pull-down list of applicable
DLCIs.
Enables or disables filtering of the IP traffic by the DLCI specified in the
DLCI pull-down list.
NOTICE: To use this filter, you must specify both the Service and DLCI
parameters in the rule configuration.
IP Address
Establishes the IP address by which the rule will filter IP traffic (if enabled).
IP Mask
Represents a range of IP addresses defined so that only machines with IP
addresses within the range defined by the mask are allowed to access an
Internet service. To mask a portion of the IP address, replace it with the wild
card character “0” (zero). (For example, 192.44.0.0 represents every computer
on the Internet with an IP address beginning with 192.44.)
Filter By IP Address
Enables or disables filtering of the IP traffic by the IP address specified in the
IP Address or IP Mask field.
IP Port
3-52
Establishes the IP port by which the rule will filter IP traffic (if enabled).
WANsuite 5160/5130
Filter By IP Port
Tx Alarm Threshold
Tx Alarm
IP Port List
Enables or disables filtering of the IP traffic by the IP port specified in the IP
Port field.
Specifies the threshold in octets for the Transmit Alarm on this rule.
Shows the current Transmit Alarm status.
Provides a drop-down list of well-known port IDs for TCP and UDP. To enter
a port ID, select an option from the list and click the “Enter” button. The
selected port ID value will then be reflected in the IP Port field.
Traffic Meter Statistics Screen
The Traffic Meter Statistics screen (Figure 3.43) displays a summary of the
number of frames and octets sent over a DLCI that have been counted in
accordance with the Service Aware “rule” established for a Service. As such,
it is Frame Relay specific (i.e., DLCIs only occur in Frame Relay links). In
addition, this screen provides data rate performance information for the period
of time specified in the Period Index field (see below). To access this screen,
click on the appropriate link under the “Statistics” column on the Service
Aware screen.
Figure 3.43 Traffic Meter Statistics Screen
The Traffic Meter Statistics screen reports on the following parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tx Frames
Tx Octets
Rx Frames
Rx Octets
Rate Peak – the peak data rate for the viewed period (see below)
Rate Average – the average data rate for the viewed period (see below)
Web Server Interface
3-53
The Period Index field is used to define the period of time for which the
Traffic Meter statistics will be reported. It represents the 24-hour, 15-minute
buckets index. Selecting a period and then clicking the “Submit” button will
display the Traffic Meter Statistics for that period. Clicking on the “All
Traffic Meter Intervals” at the bottom of the screen displays the Traffic Meter
Statistics for all intervals as defined below.
Summary
Current
Interval 1, Interval 2,
..., Interval 96
Represents the past 24 hours; reports the additive number of frames/octets, the
highest peak encountered for 24 hours, and the average for 24 hours.
Reports on the current 15-minute interval.
Reports on intervals 1-96 that correspond to the periods completed 15 minutes
ago, 30 minutes ago, ..., 24 hours ago.
SNMP Details Screen
The unit detects and reports T1 network alarms and provides several options
for reporting them, one of which is SNMP traps. When a network alarm
occurs, the unit sends a trap message to as many as eight destinations on your
network. The unit will report each alarm by transmitting an SNMP “trap” to
each non-zero Trap IP address. The SNMP Details screen (Figure 3.44) lets
you configure the SNMP parameters described in the paragraphs below.
Figure 3.44 SNMP Details Screen
3-54
Read Community
Accepts a character string identifying the group authorized to perform read
operations. The default setting is “Public.”
Write Community
Accepts a character string identifying the group authorized to perform write
operations. The default setting is “Private.”
Trap Community
Accepts a character string, which is included in SNMP traps generated by the
unit. The default setting is “Public.”
Trap IP Address
Accepts the IP address of a network device where alarm reporting traps are to
be sent.
WANsuite 5160/5130
Diagnostics Screen
The Diagnostics screen (Figure 3.45) provides a table for viewing the current
settings for the test and maintenance functions performed on the available
interfaces. This screen shows an upper-level view of all the interfaces so you
can see if any port is under test, and, if so, view the results. You may change
Diagnostic parameters on the Test Details screen, which is accessed by
clicking on the appropriate link on the Diagnostics screen. The properties of
the Diagnostics table are described in the paragraphs below.
Figure 3.45 Diagnostics Screen
Description
Loop Type
Describes the type of interface selected for testing.
Describes the type of loop test (if any) performed on the selected interface.
Setting
Displays the bandwidth on which you wish to perform the BERT.
Pattern
Specifies the pattern to be transmitted during a BERT for the selected port.
Length
Displays the length of time for which the BERT should run for the selected
interface.
State
Elapsed Time
Displays the current BERT state for the selected interface.
Displays the time elapsed since a BERT began or, if completed, the total test
time.
BE
Displays the total number of bit errors detected since the BERT began or
since error statistics were last cleared.
ES
Displays the number of asynchronous errored seconds detected since the
BERT began or since error statistics were last cleared. This parameter
includes bit error seconds and sync loss seconds.
% EFS
Displays what percent of the total BERT time ran error free. This ratio is
derived from the number of error-free seconds divided by the number of
seconds accumulated in Elapsed Time.
Test Details Screens
The Test Details screens let you set some test parameters and view other readonly parameters. This screen is also used to initiate a BERT or Loop Test.
Web Server Interface
3-55
The Network Interface Test Details screen is shown in Figure 3.46, and its
parameters are described below the figure. The Serial Interface Test Details
screen is shown in Figure 3.47, followed by a description of its parameters.
Figure 3.46 Network Interface Test Details Screen
BERT Table on Network Interface Test Details Screen
The BERT table provided on the Test Details screen lets you set the test
parameters listed below.
Setting
Displays the bandwidth on which you wish to perform the BERT. The
available values for this parameter depend on which interface is selected.
Values: Idle Channels, Channel 1...24, Net, Use Service
Default: Net
Service
Selects the channels with a service to BERT. (Refer to Figure 3.15 on
page 3-19.)
Channel Rate
Sets the bit rate to BERT for each selected channel. If “Νx64K” is selected,
the ones density requirements of the T1 network line must be ensured. If
“Νx56K” is selected, ones density for the selected DS0 channel is maintained.
Values: Nx56K, Nx64K
Default: Nx64K
BERT Pattern
Specifies the pattern to be transmitted during a test for the selected port.
Values: Marks, QRSS, 511, 2047, 2 15, Spaces
Default: QRSS
NOTICE: The 215 pattern is the ITU (European) version, not the ANSI version.
3-56
WANsuite 5160/5130
Test Duration
Specifies the length of time for which the test should run for the selected port.
Values: 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 24 hours, Continuous
Default: 15 minutes
You can also view the following read-only parameters from this screen:
Pattern Sync
Displays the state of pattern sync during a test. If no test is in progress, “No
Test” is displayed. If a test is active, but the receiver is not in pattern sync,
“No Sync” is displayed. If the receiver is in pattern sync, “In Sync” is
displayed.
Elapsed Time
Displays the time elapsed since a timed test began or, if completed, the total
test time.
Bit Errors
Displays the total number of bit errors detected since the test began or since
error statistics were cleared.
Errored Seconds
%EFS
Displays the number of asynchronous errored seconds that have been detected
since the test began or since error statistics were last cleared.
Displays the percentage of time the test ran error-free. This ratio is derived
from the number of error free seconds divided by the number of seconds
accumulated in Elapsed Time.
Loop Table on Network Interface Test Details Screen
The types of tests available for you to choose from depend on the currently
selected interface. For the Network interface, the Loop table provided near the
bottom of the Test Details screen lets you specify the type of Loop test to be
performed.Loopback diagrams are shown in Appendix A, Figure A.1.
Values: No Test (Loop Down), payload loopback (PLB), line loopback
(LLB), maintenance loopback (MLB), Far PLB, Far LLB
Default: No Test (Loop Down)
Web Server Interface
3-57
Figure 3.47 Serial Interface Test Details Screen
BERT Table on Serial Interface Test Details Screen
The BERT table lets you set the test parameters listed below.
Setting
BERT Pattern
Displays the bandwidth on which you wish to perform the BERT. The
available values for this parameter depend on which interface is selected.
Values: Net, DTE
Default: Net
Specifies the pattern to be transmitted during a test for the selected port.
Values: Marks, QRSS, 511, 2047, 2 15, Spaces
Default: QRSS
NOTICE: The 215 pattern is the ITU (European) version, not the ANSI version.
Test Duration
Specifies the length of time for which the test should run for the selected port.
Values: 15 min, 30 min, 1 hour, 24 hours, Continuous
Default: 15 min
You can also view the following read-only parameters from this screen:
3-58
Pattern Sync
Displays the state of pattern sync during a test. If no test is in progress, “No
Test” is displayed. If a test is active, but the receiver is not in pattern sync,
“No Sync” is displayed. If the receiver is in pattern sync, “In Sync” is
displayed.
Elapsed Time
Displays the time elapsed since a timed test began or, if completed, the total
test time.
Bit Errors
Displays the total number of bit errors detected since the test began or since
error statistics were cleared.
WANsuite 5160/5130
Errored Seconds
% EFS
Displays the number of asynchronous errored seconds that have been detected
since the test began or since error statistics were last cleared.
Displays the percentage of time the test ran error-free. This ratio is derived
from the number of error free seconds divided by the number of seconds
accumulated in Elapsed Time.
Loop Table on Serial Interface Test Details Screen
The Loop table provided near the bottom of the Test Details screen lets you
specify the type of Loop test to be performed. The types of tests available for
you to choose from depend on the currently selected interface. Loopback
diagrams are shown in Appendix A, Figure A.1.
Values: No Test, Port Loop, V.54 Loop, Far V.54 Loop
Default: No Test (Loop Down)
The Test Details screens provide the following user-activated buttons:
Button
Function
Start
Starts the specified BERT.
Stop
Stops the currently running BERT.
Error Inject
Injects a bit error.
Reset Errors
Resets the current error count.
Loop Submit
Sets the type of Loop test.
Trap Log Screen
The Trap Log screen (Figure 3.48) shows a collection of all the traps that
have been generated. A trap is a mechanism that permits a device to send an
alarm for certain network events to an SNMP management station; in other
words, traps are notifications of triggered alarms.
The table shown in this screen lists each trap by its Index number, and
displays the type of error captured by the trap (Trap Number), the date and
time the trap was stored (Time Stamp), its description, and its value.
To remove all trap information stored in memory, click the “Delete All
Traps” button.
Web Server Interface
3-59
Figure 3.48 Trap Log Screen
Top Talkers
Clicking on the Top Talkers link in the navigation tree displays a screen
(Figure 3.49) where you can set parameters for and initiate the generation of a
list of IP addresses ranked in terms of the number of frames and octets they
have transmitted during a specified reporting period. This report allows MIS
managers to determine who is generating the most traffic on a WAN based on
IP addresses.
Figure 3.49 Top Talkers Screen
To generate a Top Talkers report, enter the desired report size in the
appropriate field and then click the “Submit” button.
Duration
Establishes the amount of time (in seconds) for which the Top Talkers report
will capture IP traffic; typically this value is 900 seconds (15 minutes).
Time Remaining
Establishes the amount of time (in seconds) for which the Top Talkers report
will capture IP traffic; typically this value is 900 (15 minutes). As soon as
you initiate generation of the report by pressing the “Submit” button, the
Time Remaining value is copied over to the Duration field.
Requested Report Size
Establishes how many IP addresses will be reported as the “Top Talkers.”
NOTICE: While you may request any number, the unit is internally limited to a
maximum report size of 20.
3-60
WANsuite 5160/5130
As soon as the specified Duration for the report has elapsed, the screen will
refresh itself and the resulting report-specific information will be displayed in
the outlined box at the bottom of the screen. This report comprises elements
as defined in the following paragraphs.
Report #
Size
Start Time
System Up Time
Displays a unique number used to identify the generated report. This number
is generated automatically, is incremented sequentially for each report, and
can be used by management stations for automatic polling (via the
ipadv2.mib).
Displays the actual number of Top Talkers generated by the report. The
maximum report size is 20.
Displays the time at which the Top Talkers report was initiated (based on
System Up Time).
Displays the amount of time the unit has been operational since it was turned
on or last reset.
The Top Talkers table reports in descending order the IP addresses that have
generated the most traffic during the requested report’s duration. For each IP
address listed, the report displays the number of Rx frames, Rx octets, Tx
frames, and Tx octets that have been passed across it. In addition, the
Timestamp field indicates the time at which a packet was examined for the
specified IP address.
IP Gateway Details Screen
The IP Gateway is a feature of the WANsuite 5160/5130 that allows routing
of IP packets from one network to another using static routes configuration
and/or dynamic routing. The IP Gateway uses Routing Information Protocol
(RIP) 1 or RIP 2 or Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing.
RIP 1 and RIP 2 are protocols that allow exchange of routing information
between two routers. With that information exchange, a router can build its
own routing tables that later can be used for “routing” IP packets.
OSPF is a shortest path first (SPF) or link-state protocol. OSPF is also an
internal gateway protocol (IGP) that distributes routing information between
routers in a single autonomous system (AS). OSPF chooses the least cost path
as the best path.
While RIP is ideal for small- to medium-sized networks, OSPF is more
suitable for complex networks with a large number of routers. OSPF provides
equal cost multipath routing where packets to a single destination can be sent
via more than one interface simultaneously.
The IP Gateway also supports unnumbered networks. An unnumbered
network is a point-to-point connection without an assigned IP address This
feature reduces the number of IP addresses required.
Web Server Interface
3-61
Figure 3.50 IP Gateway Details Screen
RIP Parameters
RIP Enable
RIP Trust Neighbors
Globally enables RIP 1, RIP 2, or No RIP.
Values: Disable, Enable RIP1, Enable RIP2
Default: Enable RIP2
Globally enables the trusted neighbors feature. If there is a list of trusted
neighbors in an IP Gateway, only RIP packets coming from those trusted
neighbors will be used to build the internal routing table.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Enable
RIP Interval
Interval for RIP packet to be sent. Default is 30 seconds.
RIP Domain
Value representing the RIP domain. Default is 0.
OSPF Parameters
OSPF Enable
OSPF Router ID
3-62
Globally enables OSPF.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
This 32-bit number assigned to each router running the OSPF protocol
uniquely identifies the router within an Autonomous System. Each router
requires a unique router ID. Default is the LAN IP address of the unit.
WANsuite 5160/5130
The IP Gateway screen provides the following user-activated buttons:
Button
Function
RIP Parameters
Static Route Table
Displays static routes and dynamic routes information.
Static ARP Table
Displays static ARP information.
Trusted Neighbors
Displays trusted neighbors information.
OSPF Parameters
Area Table
Displays area information.
Virtual Link Table
Displays virtual link information.
Submit
Submits to the unit information specific to IP Gateway.
Circuit Table
Lets you access to circuit-related information/operation.
Circuit Table Screen
Access this menu by clicking on the “Circuit Table” button at the bottom of the
IP Gateway Details screen. The Circuit Table shows the configured circuit. To
configure a new circuit, click on "Add New."
Figure 3.51 Circuit Table Screen
Circuit Details Screen
Access this menu by accessing the appropriate numbered link under the
“Index” column on the Circuit Table screen.
Web Server Interface
3-63
Figure 3.52 Circuit Details Screen
Endpoint
IP Address
IP Mask
Max Transmit Unit
Cost
RIP Status
Multicast Status
OSPF Status
3-64
Endpoint name. By default, the first circuit is always the LAN circuit. All
other circuits are associated with Endpoint names as defined in the Endpoint
Table shown in Figure 3.36 on page 3-42.
IP Address of the circuit.
IP mask of the circuit.
Maximum transmit unit this circuit will send at any one time.
Represents the relative time of treatment of an IP packet. This value is used
when there are multiple routes to the same destination. When two or more
routes are available, the one with the lowest circuit cost is selected. A frame
relay circuit should have a higher value than a LAN circuit.
Indicates whether or not RIP is enabled on this circuit.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Enable
Indicates whether or not Multicast is enabled on this circuit.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Enable
Indicates whether or not OSPF is enabled on this circuit.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Disable
WANsuite 5160/5130
OSPF Area
Represents the area that this circuit is part of.
OSPF LSA Timer
Determines how often the Link State Acknowledgment (LSA) packet is sent.
Values: 1−3600
Default: 1
OSPF LSU Delay
The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a Link State Update
(LSU) packet over this circuit interface.
Values: 1−3600
Default: 1
OSPF Router Priority
This 8-bit unsigned integer ranges from 1 to 255 and assigns priority to one of
two routers attached to the same network; without an assigned priority, both
routers attempt to become the designated router.
Values: 1−255
Default: 1
OSPF Hello Interval
The time in seconds between the Hello packets that a router sends on a
circuit. This value is also advertised in the router’s Hello packets and must be
identical for all routers on the same network. The smaller the Hello Interval,
the sooner topological changes are detected (but then more traffic is created).
Values: 1−65535
Default: 1
OSPF Dead Interval
The number of seconds during which a router’s “Hellos” have not been
received before its neighbors declare the router down. The value must be the
same as the value on the network.
Values: 1−65535
Default: 40
OSPF Auth Key
When configured, this parameter allows an authentication procedure to be
executed on the OSPF header. If the 64-bit (8 character) password does not
correspond, the packet is thrown away.
Values: 64 bits (8 characters)
Default: 8 spaces (no authentication)
The Circuit Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:
Button
Function
Submit
Sets any values that have been changed.
Circuit Table
Returns you to the previous screen.
Static Routes Screen
Under some circumstances, it may not be necessary for a router to learn a
route using ordinary means such as RIP or OSPF. It is possible under these
circumstances for you to add a route to the route table of a router.
Web Server Interface
3-65
The Static Route Table is always associated with a circuit. Access this screen by
selecting the Static Route Table from the RIP Parameters Table on the IP
Gateway Details screen.
Figure 3.53 Static Route Table Screen
Endpoint
Target IP Address
Target IP Mask
Next Hop
Cost
Route Status
Endpoint name (or interface) through which to send the IP packet to reach the
Target IP Address.
Represents the target network that you want this router to reach.
Mask of the target network.
IP address of the next device in the route.
Cost of using that route.
Indicates whether a route is enabled or disabled.
The Static Routes Table screen provides the following user-activated buttons:
Button
Function
Dynamic Route Table
Displays all known routes.
Add New
Adds a new static route.
Route Details Screen
Access this menu by clicking on the appropriate number under the “Index”
column on the Static Route Table screen.
3-66
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 3.54 Route Details Screen
Endpoint
Target IP Address
Target IP Mask
Endpoint name (or interface) through which to send the IP packet to reach the
Target IP Address.
Represents the target network that you want this router to reach.
Values: 0.0.0.0−255.255.255.255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Mask of the Target IP or network.
Values: 0.0.0.0−255.255.255.255
Default: 0.0.0.0
NOTICE: Setting the Target IP Address and the Target IP Mask to 0.0.0.0 defines
THE default route for this unit.
Next Hop IP Address
Cost
Route Status
IP address of the next device in the route.
Cost of using that route.
Values: 0−65535
Default: 1
Indicates whether or not the current route is enabled.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Enable
The Route Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:
Button
Function
Submit
Sets any values that have been changed.
Static Route Table
Returns you to the previous screen.
Delete Route
Deletes the route currently displayed.
Web Server Interface
3-67
Dynamic Route Table Screen
Access this menu by selecting “Static Route Table” from the RIP Parameters
table on the IP Gateway menu and then selecting Dynamic Route Table. This
table shows all known dynamic and static routes. Please note that not all
parameters are necessarily defined, depending on whether or not the routes
were learned dynamically. Primarily, the most useful information is included
in "Destination," "Interface Index," and "Mask" columns.
Figure 3.55 Dynamic Route Table Screen
Destination
Interface Index
Next Hop
Mask
Network to be reached.
Internal TCP/IP stack interface number.
IP address used to reach the destination network.
Mask of the destination network.
Static ARP Table Screen
Address Resolution Protocol, or ARP, is used by the router to dynamically
associate a high-level IP address with a low-level physical hardware address.
ARP packets are only sent across a single physical network.
There are some cases when an IP-compatible device does not support ARP or
ARP is deliberately disabled (for security). In these cases, instead of using
ARP to dynamically update the router internal MAC <-> IP Address Table,
you can use this menu to force an entry into that table. This entry never times
out.
NOTICE: At least one circuit must be defined to create a Static ARP Table entry
because an ARP entry is always associated with a circuit.
Access this menu by selecting “Static ARP Table” from the RIP Parameters
screen on the IP Gateway menu. The ARP Table is useful when a Host does not
respond to an ARP request.
3-68
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 3.56 ARP Table Screen
Endpoint
IP Address
MAC Address
ARP Status
Endpoint name (or Interface) through which to send the IP packet to reach the
defined IP Address. The default is the LAN.
The IP address of the unit for which you want to define the MAC address.
The MAC address of the host to be reached.
Displays whether this static ARP is enabled or disabled.
The Static ARP Table screen provides the following user-activated buttons:
Button
Function
Dynamic ARP Table
Displays the dynamically learned MAC <-> IP address.
Add New
Adds a new static ARP.
ARP Details Screen
Access this screen by clicking on the appropriate numbered link under the
“Index” column on the ARP Table screen.
Figure 3.57 ARP Details Screen
Endpoint
IP Address
Endpoint name (or Interface) through which to send the IP packet to reach the
defined IP Address. Currently, this is always the LAN.
IP address of the circuit.
Values: 0.0.0.0−255.255.255.255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Web Server Interface
3-69
MAC Address
ARP Status
MAC address of the Host to be reached.
Values: A 6-byte value
Default: 00-00-00-00-00-00
Displays whether this ARP is enabled or disabled.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Enable
The ARP Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:
Button
Function
Submit
Sets any values that have been changed.
Static ARP Table
Returns you to the previous screen.
Delete ARP
Deletes this static ARP.
Trusted Neighbor Table Screen
The Trusted Neighbors feature can be used to store RIP information only
from specific routers. This allows the router to reject any RIP information
coming from non-Trusted Neighbors. Only information coming from Trusted
Neighbors is kept by the router.
Access this menu by selecting Trusted Neighbors from the RIP Parameters on
the IP Gateway menu. This table is useful when the Network Administrator
wants to listen to RIP of specific router(s).
Figure 3.58 Trusted Neighbor Table Screen
Neighbor Details Screen
Access this screen (Figure 3.59) by clicking on the appropriate numbered link
under the “Index” column on the Trusted Neighbor Table screen. This screen
lists all IP addresses of Trusted Neighbors.
Figure 3.59 Neighbor Details Screen
3-70
WANsuite 5160/5130
The Neighbor Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:
Button
Function
Trusted Neighborse Returns you to the previous screen.
Delete Neighbors
Deletes this Trusted Neighbor.
Area Table Screen
An Area allows growth and makes the networks at a site easier to manage. An
area is self-contained; knowledge of an area’s topology remains hidden from
other areas. Thus, multiple groups within a given site retain the ability to
change their internal network topology independently.
Access the Area Table Screen from the OSPF Parameters table on the IP
Gateway screen.
Figure 3.60 Area Table Screen
ID
Displays the ID of the Area (represented by an IP address).
Enable
Displays whether the defined Area is enabled or disabled.
Auth Type
Stub
Address Summary
Mask Summary
Advertise
Indicates Area validation.
Displays whether or not the defined area is a Stub Area.
Displays the Address Summary of the defined Area.
Displays the Mask Summary of the defined Area.
Displays whether advertising is enabled or disabled for this Area.
The “Add New” button on the Area Table screen lets you define a new Area.
Area Details Screen
Access this screen by clicking on the appropriate numbered link under the
“Index” column on the Area Table screen.
Web Server Interface
3-71
Figure 3.61 Area Details Screen
Area ID
Enable
Auth Type
Stub
Address Summary
Mask Summary
Advertise
3-72
This parameter has the same format as the IP Address of the Mask Address.
Values: 0.0.0.0−255.255.255.255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Displays whether or not this Area is enabled.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Enable
Indicates type of Authentication.
Values: Simple, None
Default: None
An area can be configured as stub when there is a single exit point from the
area, or when the choice of exit point need not be made on a per-externaldestination basis.
Values: Yes, No
Default: No
A configured address range specifies what addresses are contained within an
area. When summarizing the routes in an area to inform other areas, all routes
falling within the configured range are described by a single LSA, thus
decreasing the size of the LSA database.
Values: 0.0.0.0−255.255.255.255
Default: 0.0.0.0
IP Mask of the summary to be added.
Values: 0.0.0.0−255.255.255.255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Describes the local state of a router or network. This includes the state of the
route’s interfaces and adjacencies. Each link state advertisement is flooded
throughout the routing domain. The collected link state advertisements of all
routers and networks form the protocol's topological database.
WANsuite 5160/5130
Values: Yes, No
Default: No
The Area Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:
Button
Function
Submit
Sets any values that have been changed.
Area Table
Returns you to the previous screen.
Delete Area
Deletes the currently defined Area.
Virtual Link Table Screen
To permit maximum flexibility, OSPF allows the configuration of virtual links
to enable the backbone area to appear contiguous despite the physical reality.
In OSPF, the backbone is defined as an Area ID of 0.0.0.0. This backbone
cannot be disconnected in any way or some areas of the Autonomous System
become unreachable. This is because all inter-area traffic must go through the
backbone. In fact, the backbone is responsible for all inter-area routing
information distribution.
It is possible that an area cannot be connected directly to the backbone; in this
case a virtual link is used (Figure 3.62). To establish or maintain the
connectivity of the backbone, virtual links can be configured through nonbackbone areas. Basically, virtual links are used to connect components that
are otherwise not connected to the backbone.
A virtual link is treated by OSPF as a point-to-point unnumbered network
joining two area border routers. The virtual link must be configured in both of
the area border routers.
A virtual link is defined by the following two parameters:
•
•
The Router ID of the virtual link’s other endpoint.
The non-backbone that the virtual link crosses through.
Access this screen by selecting the Virtual Link Table from the OSPF
Parameters table on the IP Gateway screen.
Figure 3.62 Virtual Link Table Screen
Web Server Interface
3-73
Enable
Transit Area ID
Area Border Router ID
Enables this definition of a virtual link.
The non-backbone area that the virtual link goes through.
The Router ID of the virtual link’s other endpoint.
The “Add New” button lets you define a new Virtual Link.
Virtual Link Details Screen
Access this screen (Figure 3.63) by clicking on the appropriate numbered link
under the “Index” column on the Virtual Link Table screen.
Figure 3.63 Virtual Link Details Screen
The Virtual Link Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:
Button
Function
Submit
Sets any values that have been changed.
Virtual Link Table
Returns you to the previous screen.
Delete Virtual Link
Deletes currently defined Virtual Link.
TCP Server
NOTICE: TCP Server traffic has a higher priority than other types of traffic
flowing through the unit. Refer to Normal Tx Queue Size on page 3-29
for more details.
The TCP Server is a general-purpose application that maps arbitrary TCP port
numbers to non-TCP/IP devices that have been assigned an endpoint. (See the
Endpoint Table Screen on page 3-42.)
TCP Server Details Screen
The TCP Server Details screen (Figure 3.64) lets you establish TCP
connections and map them to physical devices that communicate via a
supported interface.
3-74
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 3.64 TCP Server Details Screen
Access the TCP Connection Details screen (Figure 3.65) by clicking on the
appropriate number under the “Connection” column on the above screen. The
TCP Connection Details screen lists the index number, the endpoint name, the
TCP local port number, and whether or not this entry is enabled.
Figure 3.65 TCP Connection Details Screen
Select the TCP Connection Table to access the screen shown in Figure 3.66.
This screen lets you see which addresses and ports are in a “listening” state
and which are already established.
Figure 3.66 TCP Connection Table Screen
Click on the “TCP Host Access Table” button on the TCP Connection Details
screen to access a screen (Figure 3.67) where you can specify up to 10 IP
addresses that may access the services provided by TCP Server. If no
addresses are provided, any host can access the services provided by TCP
Server.
Web Server Interface
3-75
Figure 3.67 TCP Host Access Table Screen
You can access the Host Access Details (Figure 3.68) for a specific Index
number by clicking on the appropriate numbered link under the “Index”
column.
Figure 3.68 TCP Host Access Details
Network Address Translation (NAT)
NAT is a method of connecting multiple computers to the Internet (or any
other IP network) using one IP address. This lets users cost-effectively and
efficiently connect their networks to the Internet.
Whether on a global or local port, NAT provides translation only upon receipt
of a packet, which NAT will translate, not translate, or filter, depending on
the user-specified parameters (further described below). If the decision is
made to “translate,” the packet will be modified internally, and eventually
sent on to the IP Gateway to be processed. If the decision is made not to
“translate,” the packet will not be modified in any way. If the decision is
made to “filter,” the packet will be discarded without any further action
required.
NOTICE: You must Save and Restart for any changes in NAT configuration
parameters to take effect.
3-76
WANsuite 5160/5130
NAT Details Screen
The NAT Details screen (Figure 3.69) lets the user configure the NAT global
parameters described below.
Figure 3.69 NAT Details Screen
Enable
Mode
Global IP Addr
Enables or disables NAT. Default is “Disable.”
Selects the Network Address Port Translation (NAPT) mode or the Basic
NAT mode. In NAPT mode, all hosts on the Global (public) side view all
hosts on the Local (private) side as a single internet host (one IP address). In
Basic NAT mode, the Global IP address is assigned as a Class C host address
(Mask of 255.255.255.0). Each private IP address on the Local side is mapped
to a Class C public address on the Global side. In other words, if there are 30
hosts on the private (Local) side, 30 public (Global) addresses are required.
The default is NAPT.
Global IP Address used in NAPT mode. Must be a valid Class C address.
Default is LAN IP Address.
Global Mask
IP Mask associated with defined Global IP Address. Default is LAN IP Mask.
ICMP Default Addr
Default source address used to answer any ICMP request. Default is LAN IP
Address. ICMP requests are not transferred from the Global to the Local side.
Rather they are answered by the unit itself since Local addresses are private
and do not receive unsolicited requests.
Filter Non Local
Address
Discards any packet with “non corporate” source address. Default is “Enable.”
The screen parameters listed below are related to the NAT Control Block
Timer. Note that default values should be in accordance with most NAT
applications. The timers’ values minimize NAT resources. Generally, when a
timer has expired, the resources used are no longer needed. Those resources
will then be available for other connection resources.
Web Server Interface
3-77
IP Entry Timer
The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources when not using
TCP, UDP, or ICMP.
Values: 0−65535
Default: 120
TCP Connection Timer
The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources when attempting to
establish a TCP connection.
Values: 0−65535
Default: 300
TCP Closing Timer
The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources when attempting to
close a TCP connection.
Values: 0−65535
Default: 0
TCP Disconnected
Timer
The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources when attempting to
disconnect from TCP.
Values: 0−65535
Default: 120
TCP Sequence Delta
Timer
UDP Timer
The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources when managing TCP
Packet Sequencing.
Values: 0−65535
Default: 180
The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources for a UDP port in
use.
Values: 0−65535
Default: 120
ICMP Timer
The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources for any ICMP
request.
Values: 0−65535
Default: 120
The NAT Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:
3-78
Button
Function
Submit
Sets any values that have been changed.
Static TCP Translation Table
Allows static mapping of global TCP Server ports to
a local host IP address/port combination.
Static UDP Translation Table
Allows static mapping of global UDP Server ports to
a local host IP address/port combination.
NAT Port Table
Defines NAT global/Internet and local/corporate
ports.
WANsuite 5160/5130
Static TCP Translation Table Screen
The Static TCP Translation Table screen (Figure 3.70) allows static mapping
of global TCP Server ports to a local host IP address/port combination. The
parameters described below enable access to TCP servers on the private/
corporate network “behind the NAT.” The parameters may be used only when
in NAPT mode.
Figure 3.70 Static TCP Translation Table Screen
Global Port
Decimal IP Port exposed to the global Internet. Default is 0.
Server Port
Decimal IP Port of the local TCP Server. This port is usually the same as the
Global Port. Default is 0.
Server Address
IP Address of the local TCP Server. Default is 0.0.0.0.
The Static TCP Translation Table screen provides the following user-activated
buttons:
Button
Function
NAT Details
Returns the user to the previous screen.
Add New
Lets the user add additional addresses.
You can configure or change the above-listed parameters on the NAT Static
TCP Translation Details screen (Figure 3.71), which is accessed by selecting
the appropriate number under the “Index” column on the Static TCP
Translation Table screen.
Figure 3.71 NAT Static TCP Translation Details Screen
Static UDP Translation Table Screen
The Static UDP Translation Table screen (Figure 3.73) allows static mapping
of global UDP Server ports to a local host IP address/port combination. The
parameters described below enable access to UDP Servers on the private/
Web Server Interface
3-79
corporate network “behind the NAT.” The parameters may be used only when
in NAPT mode.
Figure 3.72 Static UDP Translation Table Screen
Global Port
Decimal IP Port exposed to the global Internet. Default is 0.
Server Port
Decimal IP Port of the local UDP Server. This port is usually the same as the
Global Port. Default is 0.
Server Address
IP Address of the local UDP Server. Default is 0.0.0.0.
The Static UDP Translation Table screen provides the following useractivated buttons:
Button
Function
NAT Details
Returns the user to the previous screen.
Add New
Lets the user add an additional address.
You can configure or change the above-listed parameters on the NAT Static
UDP Translation Details screen (Figure 3.73), which is accessed by selecting
the appropriate numbered link under the “Index” column on the Static UDP
Translation Table screen.
Figure 3.73 NAT Static UDP Translation Details Screen
NAT Port Table Screen
The parameters on the NAT Port Table screen (Figure 3.74) define the NAT
global/Internet and local/Corporate ports. These parameters are configured in
the NAT Ports Details screen shown in Figure 3.75. Access the NAT Ports
Details screen by clicking on the Index number of the desired port on the
NAT Port Table screen.
3-80
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 3.74 NAT Port Table Screen
Endpoint
Enable
The Endpoint name of the circuit associated with the LAN or WAN port.
Default is LAN for the first port.
Enables or disables the NAT port. Default is “Enable.”
Default Translation
Forces translation on a specific IP port regardless of the source IP Address. If
Default Translation is set to “Enable,” the packet will never be discarded, but
will always pass through the translation path. Therefore, any packets with a
destination address different from the global/Internet network address will be
processed by the IP Gateway, and may be routed to another port. If this
parameter is set to “Disable,” no packet with a destination address different
from the global/Internet address will be processed. Setting this parameter to
“Disable” will override an “Enable” parameter set under “Filter Non Local
Address” on the NAT Details menu.
Type
Defines whether this port is local or global. Default is LAN global. All others
are local.
IP Address
IP Address of this port. Default is the value defined in the IP Gateway Circuit
Table.
Mask
Mask related to the defined IP Address. Default is the value defined in the IP
Gateway Circuit Table.
The NAT Port Table screen provides an “Add New” button that lets you add
additional addresses.
Figure 3.75 NAT Port Details Screen
Web Server Interface
3-81
The NAT Port Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:
Button
Function
Submit
Sets any values that have been changed.
NAT Details
Returns the user to the NAT Details screen.
NAT Port Table
Returns the user to the NAT Port Table screen.
Delete NAT Port
Deletes the specified NAT Port.
NAT Port Status
Displays the NAT Port Status Table screen.
The NAT Port Status Table (Figure 3.76) displays for each port the processed
packets from specific IP addresses.
Figure 3.76 NAT Port Status Table Screen
IP Address
NAT IP Address
Processed Packets
Original IP Address of the host.
Translated IP Address of the host.
Number of packets processed by NAT for this address.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
DHCP provides a mechanism through which computers using TCP/IP can
obtain protocol configuration parameters automatically through the network.
The most important configuration parameter associated with DHCP is the IP
address. A computer must initially be assigned a specific IP address that is
appropriate to the network to which the computer is attached, and that is not
assigned to any other computer on that network. If a computer moves to a
new network, it must be assigned a new IP address for that new network.
DHCP can be used to manage these assignments automatically.
DHCP has other important configuration parameters also, such as the subnet
mask, default router, and Domain Name System (DNS) server. Using DHCP,
a network administrator can avoid “hands-on” configuration of individual
computers through complex and confusing setup applications. Instead, those
computers can obtain all required configuration parameters automatically,
without manual intervention, from a centrally managed DHCP server. DHCP
is available on the 10/100 Ethernet port only.
NOTICE: You must Save and Restart for any changes in DHCP configuration
parameters to take effect.
3-82
WANsuite 5160/5130
NOTICE: Always verify that a DHCP server is available on the network before
enabling DHCP Client. If, on power-up, a DHCP server is not found, a
60-second timeout will occur.
DHCP Server Details Screen
The DHCP Server Details screen (Figure 3.77) lets you configure the
parameters described below.
Figure 3.77 DHCP Server Details Screen
Enable
Number of Ports
TTL
Service Type
Lease Time
Primary DNS IP Addr
Secondary DNS IP
Addr
Enables or disables the DHCP Server. Default is “Disable.”
Defines the number of DHCP ports to be used. In this version, only “1” is a
valid value.
Time to Live for any DHCP packet. Default is 64.
Type of Service used by the DHCP Server packet. Default is 1.
Tells the DHCP client the number of seconds it can retain this IP address. The
client should make a new DHCP request within the specified amount of time
to ensure the IP address is not given to another PC. Default is 600 seconds.
If requested by DHCP client, the client then uses this address to resolve
names of IP addresses. Default is 0.0.0.0.
If requested by DHCP client, the client then uses this secondary address to
resolve names of IP addresses. Default is 0.0.0.0.
Domain Name
Domain name to be used by all DHCP clients. Default is user’s server.
Router IP Addr
IP address that all clients use for Gateway or Router. Default is 0.0.0.0.
Primary WINS IP
Addr
If requested by DHCP client, the client then uses this address to resolve
names of IP addresses. Default is 0.0.0.0.
Web Server Interface
3-83
Secondary WINS IP
Addr
If requested by DHCP client, the client then uses this secondary address to
resolve names of IP addresses. Default is 0.0.0.0.
The DHCP Server Details screen provides the following user-activated
buttons:
Button
Function
Submit
Sets any values that have been changed.
Host Table
Lists Host names (DHCP server identification).
Static Entry Table
Creates a list of static IP addresses associated with MAC
addresses.
IP Address List Table
Defines the addresses available for DHCP clients.
IP Address Status Table Displays DHCP Server statistics.
DHCP Host Table Screen
In some cases, it may be necessary to provide an IP station with a specific
DHCP server name, which may be used by the IP station when making a
DHCP request. That name is included on the DHCP Host Table screen
(Figure 3.78), which identifies the DHCP server sending DHCP packets. This
parameter is configured on the DHCP Host Details screen (Figure 3.79)
accessed by clicking on the appropriate numbered link under the “Index”
column.
Figure 3.78 DHCP Host Table Screen
Host Name
The name of the DHCP Server. Default is none.
The DHCP Host Table screen provides the following user-activated buttons:
Button
Function
DHCP Details Returns the user to the previous screen.
Add New
Adds a new Server name.
NOTICE: You must Save and Restart for the new Server name to become active.
3-84
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 3.79 DHCP Host Details Screen
Static Entry Table Screen
The Static Entry Table screen (Figure 3.80) lists static IP addresses associated
with MAC addresses. This ensures that the same IP address will always be
used for a given PC provided its MAC address is known. These parameters
are configured on the Static Entry Details screen (Figure 3.81) accessed by
selecting a number from the “Entry Index” column.
Figure 3.80 Static Entry Table Screen
MAC Address
IP Address
Mask
Host Name
MAC Address you want to associate with an IP address.
IP Address given to the DHCP client if that client has the MAC Address
defined on this screen.
Mask associated with the IP Address shown on the screen.
Name given to the DHCP client.
The Static Entry Table screen provides the following user-activated buttons:
Button
Function
DHCP Details Returns the user to the previous screen.
Add New
Lets the user add an additional Static Entry.
Web Server Interface
3-85
Figure 3.81 Static Entry Details Screen
IP Address List Table Screen
The IP Address List Table screen (Figure 3.4) displays the “pool” of
addresses available for DHCP clients. These parameters are configured on the
IP Address Details screen (Figure 3.83) accessed by clicking on an “Index”
number.
Figure 3.82 IP Address List Table Screen
Start
Starting IP Address of the DHCP client pool.
End
Ending IP Address of the DHCP client pool.
Subnet Mask
Subnet Mask associated with the defined range.
Exclude Start
Beginning of “excluded” range.
Exclude End
End of “excluded” range.
The IP Address List Table screen provides the following user-activated
buttons:
Button
Function
DHCP Details Returns the user to the previous screen.
Add New
3-86
WANsuite 5160/5130
Lets the user add an additional IP address.
Figure 3.83 IP Address Details
IP Address Status Table Screen
The IP Address Status Table screen (Figure 3.84) displays a list of all current
DHCP clients.
Figure 3.84 IP Address Status Table Screen
MAC Address
IP Address
Status
MAC Address of this DHCP client.
IP Address given to this DHCP client if that client has the MAC Address
defined on this screen.
Provides IP Address Status.
Bridge
A Bridge operates at the physical network layer, connecting two or more
networks and forwarding packets between those networks. For example, a
Bridge will connect two or more physical Ethernet cable segments and
forward Ethernet packets from one segment to the other.
Bridges differ from routers in that bridges forward packets based on physical
addresses rather than on the IP Addresses that routers use to forward packets.
Bridges will not “blindly” forward packets from one network to others,
however. Rather, it learns all local physical addresses and forwards packets
based on those learned “tables.” This greatly reduces the number of
broadcasted packets, thus saving valuable bandwidth.
The Bridge Details screen shown in Figure 3.85 lets you access and configure
the parameters described below.
Web Server Interface
3-87
Figure 3.85 Bridge Details Screen
From this screen, you may view the parameters described below.
Enable
Group Multicast MAC
Address
Bridge ID
Hello Timer
MAC Address recognized by the Bridge as the group address for the Bridge
Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) transfer between bridges.
Values: Any valid Group Multicast MAC Address
Default: 0180C2000000
Consists of a bridge priority and its own MAC Address.
Values: 1−65535
Default: 2
Specifies the BPDU broadcasting interval.
Values: 1−65535 s
Default: 10 s
Max Age Timer
Specifies the length of time a bridge will consider the network topology held
in memory as valid.
Values: 1−65535 s
Default: 60 s
Forward Delay
Specifies the length of time to delay creation of a temporary loop in the
network.
Values: 1−65535 s
Default: 5 s
Filter Ageing Timer
3-88
Enables or disables Bridging capability.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Disable
Specifies the length of time an entry in the lookup table will be held if no
traffic is received from the specified MAC Address.
Values: 1−65535 s
Default: 300 s
WANsuite 5160/5130
The Bridge Details screen provides the following user-activated buttons:
Button
Function
Submit
Sets any values that have been changed.
Bridge Port Table
Displays the Bridge Port Table screen (Figure 3.86) that lets
the user access and configure the Bridge Port Details screen
(Figure 3.87).
Bridge Lookup Table
Displays the Bridge Lookup Table screen (Figure 3.88) that
contains all MAC Addresses learned by the Bridge.
Figure 3.86 Bridge Port Table
The Bridge Port Table screen lets you view the parameters described below
the Bridge Port Details screen. Clicking on a number in the “Index” column
of the Bridge Port Table will bring up the Bridge Port Details screen, which
displays, and, in some cases, lets you change, the parameters described below.
Figure 3.87 Bridge Port Details
Enable
Endpoint
BPDU Option
Filter By Multicast
Addr Dest
Enables or disables Bridging on this port.
Endpoint name.
Shows if BPDU packet will be sent and received on this port.
Filters multicast messages received on this port, which reduces the load on the
WAN connection.
Web Server Interface
3-89
Filter By Broadcast
Addr Dest
Filters broadcast messages received on this port, which reduces the load on
the WAN connection.
Forward IP Frames
Only
Setting this option to “Yes” specifies that only IP frames will be forwarded
and all other frames will be filtered.
Priority
Path Cost
State
Value of priority associated with this port. The lower the value, the higher the
priority.
Value of efficiency of the path to the port. A higher path cost indicates a
slower link.
If Enabled, reflects the state of the port. “Blocking” means there is no data
transfer between LANs. “Listening” means the frames received from this port
are filtered, but do not modify the Lookup Table. “Learning” means that
while the port continues to look at frames without participating in data
transfer, the frames received from the port will be used to update the Lookup
Table. “Forwarding” means the port participates fully in data transfer and the
frames received are used to update the Lookup Table.
Designated Root
MAC Address of the designated root of the spanning-tree topology.
Designated Cost
Associated Path Cost to the route for this port.
Designated Bridge
Forward
Transmissions
Input Frame
Designated Bridge MAC Address.
Number of times this port has changed from any other state to a “Forwarding”
state.
Number of frames received.
Output Frame
Number of frames transmitted.
Input Discards
Number of frames discarded.
Figure 3.88 Bridge Lookup Table
Address
Port
Status
3-90
MAC Address learned and included in the forwarding table.
Port where the MAC Address was learned.
How the address was included in the forwarding table. The two possibilities
include “Self” (the unit’s own MAC address), and “Learned” (the unit-learned
MAC address is directly accessible by this port).
WANsuite 5160/5130
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
Use the SMTP Details Screen (Figure 3.89) to configure the SMTP function
of the WANsuite 5160/5130. SMTP is used to forward notification of events
to a user-definable list of up to five recipients. The even notification is sent as
an e-mail in the following format:
From: WANsuite@verilink.com
To: Event Receiver
Subject: Even Notification
IP Address: 192.168.60.157
System Up Time: 0 days, 01:20:02
System Name:
System Location:
System Contact:
Reporting the following event:
OOFS Threshold Exceeded, ifIndex 3, Count 5
The parameters associated with the SMTP Details screen are described below.
Figure 3.89 SMTP Details Screen
Mail Server IP Address
Domain Name
IP address of the mail server to which notifications will be sent.
Name of domain where the device resides (i.e., Verilink.com)
Mail From
E-mail address of the device (WANsuite). While the device will not be able to
retrieve e-mail from a service, the mail needs to have the “From” address
filled in.
Recipient 1...5
E-mail addresses of recipients of event notifications (i.e., sales@verilink.com
or support@verilink.com).
Encryption
If a DLCI encapsulation is set for FRF.17 instead of RFC1490, all data will
be encrypted using FRF.17 Mode One formats and protocols. However, the
encryption method is Blowfish, rather than the DES specified in FRF.17.
Web Server Interface
3-91
NOTICE: This software-based encryption should not affect performance of the
unit in a SCADA environment because the message size is quite small.
However, a main site unit encrypting up to 128 DLCIs and operating a
number of remote units using encryption will see a degradation in
performance as traffic increases.
Figure 3.90 Encryption Details Screen
Utilities
The options available beneath the Utilities branch of the navigation tree serve
as utilities for upgrading the software in your WANsuite 5160/5130,
managing access with passwords, and logging off the system.
NOTICE: Make sure you allow sufficient time for the download to occur.
Cancelling the download before it has fully executed will result in the
new software NOT being installed into the unit.
Upload/Save
The Upload/Save screen (Figure 3.91) lets you save a new configuration,
upload a former configuration, or install software.
NOTICE: Make sure you allow sufficient time for the installation to occur.
Cancelling the installation before it has fully executed will result in the
new software NOT being installed into the unit.
3-92
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 3.91 Upload/Save Screen
Password
The Password screen (Figure 3.92) is used to modify the password that
restricts access to the Web Server interface.
Acceptable characters for use in a password are digits 0–9 and letters A–Z
and a–z, for a total of 62 distinct characters.
Figure 3.92 Password Screen
To change either the Admin or Read-Only password, you must enter it once
in the New Password field and then re-enter the same password in the
Confirm Password field. After entering the new password in both these fields,
click the “Change Admin Password” or the “Change Read Only Password”
button to update and establish the new password.
NOTICE: Remember that passwords are case-sensitive and are limited to no more
than 10 characters. When logging on, password must be entered exactly
as it was programmed.
Web Server Interface
3-93
Log Out
The Log Out screen (Figure 3.93) is used to log the current user off of the
Web Server. The Log Out function is only available after user password
protection has been set. You will be logged out of the system automatically
1 hour after you user log on using a password to gain access; after this, you
will be required to enter the password to gain write access.
Figure 3.93 Log Out Screen
In-band Management
There are two ways to implement remote in-band management of a
WANsuite 5160/5130 unit. The first is to use the local router to route
management frames (Web browser or SNMP) between the local LAN and the
remote unit. The second is to use the local WANsuite 5160/5130 unit as an
independent gateway.
Use of Connected Local Router
If this method is used, there is no configuration required in the WANsuite
5160/5130s. Local Router A will route Web/SNMP frames from the PC to the
remote WANsuite 5160/5130s. The remote WANsuite 5160/5130 IP address
must be set within the same network as the remote routers B and C LAN
network.
Figure 3.94 Frame Relay Network
PC
Router
A
WANSUITE
5160/5130
FSM
Router
B
WANSUITE
FSM
5160/5130
Router
C
WAN
SUITE
FSM
5160/5130
If the remote units are required to have an IP address for Networks that are
different from the remote routers, a static route will have to be configured in
the local router (Router A) for each remote WANsuite 5160/5130 to manage.
If Router A becomes unavailable, there is no way to reach the remote
WANsuite 5160/5130s.
3-94
WANsuite 5160/5130
Use of Local WANsuite 5160/5130 as a Gateway
If you choose this method, the WANsuite 5160/5130s are totally independent
from the routers, so all units will be accessible as long as the frame relay
network stays up. The IP address assignment is also independent from the
routers. The PC used for management must have the local WANsuite 5160/
5130’s IP address as its gateway address so that it can reach all remote
WANsuite 5160/5130s.
Figure 3.95 Frame Relay Network
Router
A
WANSUITE
FSM
5160/5130
Router
B
WAN
SUITE
FSM
5160/5130
Router
C
WAN
SUITE
FSM
5160/5130
PC
In the local WANsuite 5160/5130, the IP address and mask of each remote
WANsuite 5160/5130 will have to be configured in the Endpoint table. The
“In-Band Management” parameter will also have to be set in the
corresponding DLCI. Each remote WANsuite 5160/5130 must be part of a
different IP network address.
Web Server Interface
3-95
3-96
WANsuite 5160/5130
CHAPTER
4
VT100 INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4
Introduction
This chapter describes the menus and options associated with the WANsuite
5160/5130’s VT100 interface. The screens displayed throughout this chapter
were accessed through a TELNET session and are, for the most part,
WANsuite 5160 screens. However, where there are significant differences
between the 5160 and 5130 screens, both are displayed.
NOTICE: The material presented in this chapter follows the order in which the
screens are presented in the VT100 interface. However, because the
parameters you specify in the Service Table attach protocols to
interfaces, you must configure the Service Table first. (See Service
Table Screen on page 4-20.) You will not be able to allocate channels
(see Channel Table Details Screen on page 4-25) until the Service
Table has been configured.
Accessing the VT100 Interface
You can access the VT100 interface locally via the Supervisory port or
remotely through a TELNET session. To access the VT100 screens locally,
verify the Supervisory type is “tty” and the Supervisory port speed matches
the terminal emulation program that’s being used. (Port speeds supported
include the following: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and
115200 bps.) You can access the VT100 interface remotely by opening a
TELNET session, entering the unit’s IP address, and connecting to the unit.
Screen Components
The VT100 terminal screens have several components common to all screens
(see Figure 4.1 below). These components include the device type (in the
example below, Verilink WANsuite 5160), which is centered on the screen,
the software and hardware revision numbers (upper left), the date and time
(upper right), the menu title (“Main” in the figure below), and the serial
number under which the unit is operating. Except for the Main screen shown
VT100 Interface
4-1
in Figure 4.2, the screen captures throughout this chapter show only the
configuration portion of the screen and not the screen components.
Figure 4.1
VT100 Terminal Screen Components
Cursor Controls
The VT100 interface uses a blinking cursor to select various menus and then
to select sub-menus and/or fields within those menus. You can navigate using
this cursor in different ways, depending on the program you use. Most
programs allow use of the “Tab” key and the “Shift+Tab” keys. Others allow
use of the arrow keys.
NOTICE: If you are not able to use your arrow keys, access the pull-down menu
under “Terminal,” click on “Preferences,” and be sure the “VT100
Arrows” box is checked.
For keyboards that don’t have these standard keys or have only some of them,
an alternative set of cursor control commands is provided. Perform each
command by pressing a letter key while holding down the “Ctrl” key. You
may use the alternative commands (listed in the table below) and keyboard
commands interchangeably at your discretion.
Keyboard Command
Alternative Command
Left Arrow
Ctrl+S
Right Arrow
Ctrl+D
Up Arrow
Ctrl+E
Down Arrow
Ctrl+X
Backspace
Ctrl+H
Delete
Ctrl+Z
You can navigate further within a menu as described below.
Field Types
Each menu screen is composed of fields. The two basic field types are userselectable (most of these are in brackets or parentheses) and display-only (no
brackets or parentheses). If you can move the highlighted cursor to a field,
that field is user-selectable; all other fields are display-only. User-selectable
fields are those in which you can make changes or execute commands. To
save changed parameters, in most cases you will “Esc” out of the current
4-2
WANsuite 5160/5130
menu after changing the parameters. In some cases, you will press the “Enter”
key to save new parameters.
Fields enclosed in brackets [ ] offer a list of selections from which to choose.
The selections may be made by pressing your Spacebar to “toggle” between
choices. Each time the Spacebar is pressed, a new item appears. When the
item you wish to choose is displayed, press the “Esc” key to save it.
Fields enclosed in parentheses ( ) are manipulated by one of the following
two methods. The first is to press the “Enter” key to simply execute the
function. The most common type of field in parentheses accepts typed input
in the form of letters and/or numbers. Typing characters when the field is
highlighted causes the current entry to be replaced by the new characters. To
edit an existing entry rather than replace it, press the right arrow key to move
the cursor to the point that needs editing. You may insert characters or delete
them. Typed data must always be inserted rather than typed over. If the field
is full, you must first delete at least one character before you can add another.
The lower right corner of each screen displays whether or not a “Save and
Restart” is necessary when parameters are changed on the currently displayed
screen.
NOTICE: The VT100 screens are automatically refreshed every 4 seconds.
However, you may also press Ctrl+U to refresh data on any screen.
Menu Structure
The Main Menu screen (shown in Figure 4.2) lists the functional useraccessible menus. To activate a specific menu, tab to it (or use your arrow
keys) and press “Enter.” To exit this or any subsequent menu, press the “Esc”
key. If you exit the Main menu, the terminal interface program terminates.
This is a valid way to end a session. When you exit any menu other than the
Main menu, you will be returned to the previous screen.
Figure 4.2
Main Menu Screen
VT100 Interface
4-3
CAUTION: If you do not enter a keystroke for 10 minutes, the terminal interface
logs you off automatically.
System Screen
The first option on the Main menu screen is the System screen (Figure 4.3).
This screen lets you view and set specific information about the unit in
service.
Figure 4.3
System Screen
The System screen displays the fields shown in the table below.
4-4
Field
Description
Contact
Read/write field used to store the name of a point-ofcontact for system failure.
Name
Read/write field that holds the unit’s name.
Location
Read/write field that holds the unit's location.
FrameStart ID
Read/write field that holds the unit's ID that uniquely
identifies the unit and is used in the FrameStart
applications.
Blank Fields
Read/write fields for user-specific labels and values.
Information resides in non-volatile memory.
Time
Read/write field that holds the unit's internal time setting
in standard 24-hour HH:MM:SS format.
Date
Read/write field that holds the unit's internal date setting
in standard MM/DD/YY format.
WANsuite 5160/5130
Field
Description
New Admin Password
Lets you modify your Admin or Read-only password by
New Read Only Password typing in a new password. Acceptable characters for use
in a password are digits 0–9 and letters A–Z and a–z, for a
total of 62 distinct characters.
LCD Interface
Lets the user enable or disable the LCD interface buttons
of the unit.
NOTICE: Remember that passwords are case-sensitive and are limited to no more
than 10 characters. When logging on, password must be entered exactly
as it was programmed.
The System screen displays the user-selectable prompts listed in the table
below.
Prompt
Function
Maintenance Reset
Brings up a screen where you can reset unit to its default
TDM or Packet, Packet 2, Packet 3, or Packet 4
configuration.
Save and Restart
Saves the current configuration and restarts the unit.
Maintenance Reset
Select this prompt to access a screen (Figure 4.4) where you can reset your
unit to factory defaults.
Figure 4.4
Maintenance Reset Screen
Using the space bar, you may toggle through the options to select the desired
maintenance reset (Default TDM Configuration, Default Packet Configuration,
Default Packet 2 Configuration, Default Packet 3 Configuration, or Default
VT100 Interface
4-5
Packet 4 Configuration). After you select an option, the unit will display a
confirmation screen (Figure 4.5) where you may choose either to proceed with
the maintenance reset or not.
Figure 4.5
Confirmation Screen
NOTICE: Performing a “Maintenance Reset” or a “Save and Restart” will
terminate communications with the unit. Refresh (by pressing
“Ctrl+U”) after approximately 10 seconds to restore communications.
Save and Restart
Selecting “Save and Restart” will display a confirmation menu similar to that
shown in Figure 4.5. Select “yes” to save current configuration settings.
Interfaces Screen
The WANsuite 5160 Interfaces screen in Figure 4.6 and the WANsuite 5130
Interfaces screen in Figure 4.7 display lists of all the units’ available
interfaces.
4-6
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 4.6
WANsuite 5160 Interfaces Screen
Figure 4.7
WANsuite 5130 Interfaces Screen
From the 5160 Interfaces screen, you may choose from the following:
Network 1, Network 2, Serial 1, Serial 2, 10/100 Ethernet, or Supervisory.
From the 5130 Interfaces screen, you may choose from Network, Serial, 10/
100 Ethernet, or Supervisory.
Network Screens
The Network 1 and Network 2 screens on the 5160 and the Network screen
on the 5130 offer the same parameters except for the “Function” parameter,
which is found only on the Network 2 Config screen (Figure 4.8). All
Network ports operate in the long-haul or short-haul mode. The Network
Config screens let you view and make changes to the Network interface's
configuration as described below. In addition, these screens provide a table
that displays the alarm values for the Network interface.
VT100 Interface
4-7
Figure 4.8
Function (Network 2
Only)
Network 2 Config Screen (5160 only)
In the Slaved function, Network 2 is slaved and can only be mapped to
Network 1. In the Network function, Network 2 functions as an independent
network, but can only be mapped to Serial 2.
Values: Slaved, Network
Default: Slaved
NOTICE: The “Function” parameter fundamentally affects the operation of the
unit. Even though this parameter is found only on the Net 2 screen, its
setting affects both Network ports and the Service table.
Framing
Selects the framing for the network side of the DSU/CSU.
Values ESF, D4
Default: ESF
Line Coding
Sets the network side line coding.
Values: B8ZS, AMI
Default: B8ZS
PRM Enable
Lets you establish which performance messaging standard will be employed
to initiate Performance Report Message (PRM) functions. Setting this field to
“Enable” instructs the unit to use ANSI T1.403, which sends a PRM once
every second. Setting this field to “Disable” instructs the unit to use AT&T
TR54016, which provides performance reporting on request only.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
4-8
WANsuite 5160/5130
Learn DS0s on Boot
Learned DS0 Rate
Determines if the unit will attempt to discover active DS0s (after power-up,
Save and Restart). Active DS0s will then be assigned to the first associated
network service.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
Specifies the rate at which each discovered DS0 will be set.
Values: As 56K/64K
Default: As 64K
NOTICE: The unit will search for active DS0s for a maximum of 7 seconds if
learning “As 64k” and for 30 seconds if learning “As 56K.”
Timing
Sets the timing source to synchronize the unit’s internal timing generators. In
all cases, slips are controlled to occur on frame boundaries at the Network
ports when timing synchronization is lost. The options are as follows:
Network 1
“Function” parameter (on the Network 2 Config screen) in Slave mode −
Internal, Network 1, Network 2, Serial 1, Serial 2
“Function” parameter (on the Network 2 Config screen) in Network mode −
Internal, Network 1, Serial 1
Network 2
“Function” parameter in Slave mode − timing parameter is ignored in Slave
mode
“Function” parameter in Network mode − Internal, Network 2, Serial 2
Network (5130) − Internal, Network, Serial
Definitions of the timing sources are as follows:
Internal – The unit’s internal frequency standard (T1 1.544 Mbps ± 50 bps)
is used for all timing.
Network 1, Network 2, Network – Timing is derived from the Network port
recovered clock.
Serial 1, Serial 2, Serial – Timing is derived from the Serial port recovered
clock.
Mode
Selects the network service type.
Values: Long Haul, Short Haul
Default: Long Haul
Line Build-Out (Long
Haul)
Sets the transmit Line Build Out (LBO) for the Long-Haul network interface.
Values: 0, −7.5, −15.0, −22.5 dB
Default: 0 dB
VT100 Interface
4-9
DSX Level (Short
Haul)
Specifies the DTE DSX-1 interface output level.
Zero Suppression
Determines whether ones density insertion is activated after 15 zeros. This
parameter is ignored if the Coding parameter is set to “B8ZS.”
Values: 0−110, 111−220, 221−330, 331−440, 441−550, 551−660, >661 ft
Default: 0−110 ft
Values: Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
Error Status and Alarm Thresholds Table
The unit can be programmed to generate an alarm condition based on a
specific level of performance degradation. The Network screens present a
table that provides current error status and alarm threshold information.
Acceptable alarm thresholds are set for periods of 1-5, 10, 20, or 30 seconds
(900 seconds), and are sampled every second. The error types listed in the
following paragraphs can be preset to a value between 0 and 900 seconds.
Setting a field to “0” (zero) disables the alarm on that statistic. To effectively
disable alarm reporting, set all fields to “0” (zero).
The 15-minute time frame is not based on the TR 54016 or T1.403 interval
boundaries, but is a time window based on the accumulated counts over the
previous fifteen 1-minute intervals. In all cases, if the number of actual
network errored seconds in the previous 15 minutes reaches the preset
threshold for the specified error type, an alarm condition is declared.
The four columns of the status table are as follows:
•
•
Status: Displays the current status of the network port.
•
Count: Displays the number of events or occurrences of this statistic that
have been detected.
•
Threshold: Displays a read/write field that can be set to a desirable
threshold.
Alarm: Displays the alarm value of the network port. The unit declares an
alarm as soon as the count exceeds the threshold set.
The table provides error status and alarm threshold information for the
following error parameters:
ES
SES
LOSS
4-10
Sets the Errored Seconds (ES) threshold. An ES is a 1-second period in which
at least one logic error occurred. The default value is 45 seconds.
Sets the Severely Errored Seconds (SES) threshold. An SES is a 1-second
period in which at least 320 CRC errors or one Out-of-Frame (OOF) error
occurred. The default value is 5 seconds.
Sets the Loss of Signal Seconds (LOSS) threshold. A LOSS is 1-second
period in which the E1 received signal is interrupted. The default value is
5 seconds.
WANsuite 5160/5130
UAS
Sets the Unavailable Seconds (UAS) threshold. A UAS is a 1-second period
in which consecutive severely errored seconds cause an unavailable state. The
default is 0 seconds (Disabled).
CSS
Sets the Controlled Slip Seconds (CSS) threshold. The default is 0 seconds
(Disabled).
BPVS
Sets the Bipolar Violation Errored Seconds (BPVS) threshold. A BPVS is a 1second period in which at least one bipolar violation occurred. The default is
0 seconds (Disabled).
OOFS
Sets the Out of Frame Seconds (OOFS) threshold. An OOFS is a 1-second
period in which a frame sync loss occurred. The default value is 5 seconds.
AISS
Sets the Alarm Indication Signal Seconds (AISS) threshold. An AIS is a 1second period when unframed all ones are received. The default is 0 seconds
(Disabled).
RAS
Sets the Remote Alarm Seconds (RAS) threshold. An RAS is generated by
the terminal equipment when an improper signal is received from the facility
(or upon receipt of unframed all ones). The default is 0 seconds (Disabled).
Reset Timer
Sets the Reset Timer threshold. This read/write field is used to establish the
contiguous number of seconds that an alarm parameter must be clear before
the alarm is reset. Applicable values range from 000 through 900. A value of
“000” means the alarm will never be reset.
The Network screens provide the user-selectable prompts described in the
table below.
Prompt
Function
Clear Alarms
Resets the alarm conditions related to the Network 1 (5160) or
Network (5130) and counts to zero.
Performance
Displays a current count of the number of error events that have
occurred over the past 24 hours and the past 30 days.
Learn DS0s Now
Learns which DS0s are active and assigns them to the first
associated network service. Learned DS0s are based on the idle
pattern specified in the Channel Table (see below).
Channels
Displays the Channel Table Details screen (found on page 4-25),
showing each channel by Index number. Each channel’s rate and
service (by number) are displayed and can be changed through
user input.
Performance Screens
The Performance prompt near the bottom of the Network screens displays a
Performance 24 Hour screen (Figure 4.9), which provides a summary of the
error events that have occurred during each interval of the past 24 hours. In
addition to the parameters already defined on the Error Status and Alarm
VT100 Interface
4-11
Thresholds Table on page 4-10, the following parameters are included on the
Performance screens.
BES
A Bursty Error Second (BES) is a 1-second period during which at least more
than one but fewer than 320 CRC6 errors occurred.
LOFC
The Loss of Frame Count (LOFC) represents the number of time a loss of
frame is declared. A loss of frame is declared after 2.5 seconds of continuous
loss of signal or OOF.
CRCES
A Cyclic Redundancy Check Errored Second (CRCES) is a method of
confirming the integrity of received data.
Figure 4.9
Performance 24 Hour Screen
Select the “Performance 30 Day Prompt” on this screen to see a detailed
summary of the error events that have occurred during each interval of the
past 30 days (Figure 4.10).
Figure 4.10 Performance 30 Day Screen
4-12
WANsuite 5160/5130
CAUTION: Performance data will be lost upon power cycle or after performing a
Maintenance Reset/Restart.
Serial Screens
The Serial 1 and Serial 2 screens on the WANsuite 5160 or Serial screen on
the WANsuite 5130 let you view and make changes to the unit’s Serial
interface configuration as described below. The parameters on all Serial
screens are the same except for the Invert Clock parameter, which is found
only on the Serial 2 screen; therefore, the WANsuite 5160 Serial 2 screen
(Figure 4.11) is the only one shown below.
To make changes to any Serial parameter, simply set the parameter to the
desired selection and press the “Esc” key.
Figure 4.11 Serial 2 Screen
Type
This parameter selects the type of interface (based on its electrical signal
characteristics) used by the equipment connected to the Serial port.
Values: V.35, RS-232, EIA-530
Default: V.35
NOTICE: V.35 requires the use of an optional cable. Refer to Appendix A,
“Specifications,” for ordering information.
Mode
By default, the Serial port serves as a DCE port in both Packet and TDM
modes. However, the Serial port can serve as a DTE port when the unit is in
Packet mode.
If the Serial port connects to a DTE device (such as a FRAD or a router), the
Mode parameter must be set to “DCE.” If this port connects to a DCE device
VT100 Interface
4-13
(like a DSU/CSU), this parameter must be set to “DTE” (valid only for Packet
mode, not TDM).
Values: DCE, DTE
Default: DCE
NOTICE: DTE mode requires the use of an optional DTE cable. Refer to
Appendix A, “Specifications,” for ordering information.
Packet Rate
If the port is running in Packet mode, the Rate must be configured to the
desired port speed (in bits per second). In TDM mode, the port speed rate will
be set by configuring the next four parameters (Start Channel, Number of
Channels, Bundling, and Channel Rate).
Values: Nx56K or Nx64K where N = 1-32
Default: 1536 kbps
Bundling
Selects whether the DTE channel assignment is made as a “Contiguous”
group or as “Alternate” channels. Selecting “Alternate” ensures ones density.
Because the unit allows individual channels to be configured for a service, a
value of “Arbitrary” will be returned for this parameter if the current channel
allocation is not contiguous or Alternate. The “Arbitrary” value can only be
supplied by the unit − it cannot be set by the user.
Values: Contiguous, Alternate, Arbitrary
Default: Contiguous
NOTICE: Because “Alternate” Bundling assigns every other channel, only half
the channels are available.
Start Channel
Selects the starting channel in the 24-channel DS1 bit stream. Starting with
the specified channel, the unit automatically assigns the channels that follow.
Values: 1 through 24
Default: 1
# of Channels
Specifies the number of channels to be assigned to the DTE.
Values: 0 through 24
Default: 24 Channel Rate
Channel Rate
The unit can operate at any data rate that is a multiple of 56 or 64 kbps. If
“Νx64K” is selected, the ones density requirements of the T1 network line
must be ensured. If “Νx56K” is selected, ones density for the selected DS0
channel is maintained.
Values: Nx56K, Nx64K
Default: Nx64K
NOTICE: Start Channel, Number of Channels, and Channel Rate cannot be
changed if Bundling is not also changed from “Arbitrary.”
4-14
WANsuite 5160/5130
Invert Clock
In DTE Packet mode, this parameter changes the clock edge of the
transmitted data. The Invert Clock parameter is only available for use in DTE
mode, and DTE mode is only available for the Serial 2 port. Consequently,
this configuration option only works for the Serial 2 port, and should remain
disabled when configuring services for the Serial 1 port.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
Tx Clock
Selects the clock the unit uses to sample the data transmitted from the DTE.
When set to “Internal,” the data is sampled directly with the transmit data
clock that is also supplied to the DTE as Transmit Clock. The “External”
option uses the external clock from the DTE.
Values: Internal, External
Default: Internal
NOTICE: The “External” option is valid only in Packet mode.
LL
The Local Loopback parameter can be set to “Enable” or “Disable.” Selecting
“Enable” allows the unit to go into Local Loop when the LL pin on the
Serial 1 port goes high. The unit exits the loop when the LL pin goes low. If
you select “Disable,” the unit ignores the LL pin on the Serial port.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
NOTICE: For more information on pin assignments, refer to Connector Pin
Assignments shown on page A-7.
V54
Selecting “Enable” allows the unit to respond to in-band V.54 loop codes. If
you select “Disable,” the unit ignores these codes.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
DTR Alarm Control
Lets you set DTR Alarm Control parameters. Selecting “Enable” allows the
unit to go into alarm on loss of DTR, which occurs when the Serial port
detects that the DTR signal is low.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Disable
DTR Alarm Status
Format
Lets you view the current DTR Alarm status.
Selects the port’s operating mode.
Values: Sync, Async
Default: Sync
VT100 Interface
4-15
Flow Control
Selects the type of flow control to be used if the port is asynchronous.
Values: None, Xon/Xoff, RTS/CTS
Default: None
Character Size
Selects the number of bits required to make up one asynchronous character.
Values: Five, Six, Seven, Eight
Default: Eight
Parity
Sets the parity bit if the port is asynchronous.
Values: None, Odd, Even
Default: None
Stop Bit
Selects the number of bits required to end the character.
Values: 1, 2
Default: 1
CTS
The Clear To Send parameter can be set to “Forced True,” “Forced False,” or
“Internal.” If this parameter is set to “Internal,” the CTS control lead follows
the RTS control lead from the DTE after a delay of a duration established by
the RTS/CTS Delay parameter. (See RTS/CTS Delay shown on page 4-16)
Values: Forced True, Forced False, Internal
Default: Forced True
DSR
Data Set Ready can be set to “Forced True,” “Forced False,” or “Internal.”
The “Internal” option sets DSR “On” if the port is enabled and “Off” if the
port is disabled.
Values: Forced True, Forced False, Internal
Default: Forced True
DCD
The Data Carrier Detect parameter can be set to “Forced True,” “Forced
False,” or “Internal.” If set to “Internal,” DCD is “On” when network carrier
is being received from the remote end, and is “Off” when network carrier is
not being received from the far end.
Values: Forced True, Forced False, Internal
Default: Forced True
RTS
The Request To Send parameter determines the source from which the unit
reads the RTS signal status. If set to “Normal,” the unit gets RTS from the
DTE on the Serial interface. If set to “Forced True,” RTS is always perceived
as “On.”
Values: Normal, Forced True
Default: Normal
RTS/CTS Delay
The Request To Send/Clear To Send parameter determines how long the unit
waits before it changes the level of CTS to match RTS when the CTS
parameter is set to “Internal.”
Values: Normal (~30 ms delay), Long (~100 ms delay)
Default: Normal
4-16
WANsuite 5160/5130
Current Pin Status
The Current Pin Status, which shows the state of the RS-232 pins, is also
displayed on the Serial interface screens.
10/100 Ethernet (IP Details) Screen
If you select “Ethernet” from the Interfaces screen, you will bring up an IP
Details screen (Figure 4.12) that lets you view and/or modify the IP
parameters listed below.
Figure 4.12 IP Details Screen
Unit IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway IP Address
DHCP Client
Client Identifier
Ethernet
Physical Address
A unique Network address assigned to this unit.
Defines the Network portion of the unit’s IP address.
IP address of the default gateway (router) on the LAN side of the unit.
If DHCP Client is enabled at power-up, the unit will request its IP, Mask, and
Gateway addresses from a DHCP server located on the LAN side of the unit,
and the unit will use these addresses. If the DHCP request is unsuccessful, the
unit will use the configured addresses shown on this screen.
Displays a unique identifier for a specific IP address.
Enables or disables a remote unit’s Ethernet port.
Displays unique MAC address.
NOTICE: Always verify that a DHCP server is available on the network before
enabling DHCP Client. If, on power-up, a DHCP server is not found, a
60-second timeout will occur.
VT100 Interface
4-17
NOTICE: If you manually change the IP address, you must “Save and Restart.”
(See Save and Restart on page 4-6.)
Select the Unit Access Table prompt on the Ethernet (IP Details) screen to
view the Unit Access Table (Figure 4.13), which specifies up to 10 different
IP networks that may access the unit. If no IP networks are supplied, any host
can access the unit. Select an <Ndx> number on the table to view the Unit
Access Details (Figure 4.14) that correspond with that number.
Figure 4.13 Unit Access Table
Figure 4.14 Unit Access Details
Supervisory Configuration Screen
The Supervisory Configuration screen (Figure 4.15) displays the current speed
of the Supervisory port interface along with other parameters as described
below. The Supervisory port supports only asynchronous character formats.
4-18
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 4.15 Supervisory Configuration Screen
Speed
Changes the Supervisory port speed (in bits per second).
Values: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
Default: 19200
Character Size
Selects the number of bits required to make up one asynchronous character.
Values: Five, Six, Seven, Eight
Default: Eight
Parity
Sets the parity bit.
Values: None, Odd, Even
Default: None
Stop Bit
Selects the number of bits required to end the character.
Values: 1, 2
Default: 1
DTR Alarm Control
Lets you set DTR Alarm Control parameters. Selecting “Enable” allows the
unit to go into alarm on loss of DTR, which occurs when the Supervisory port
detects that the DTR signal is low.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Disable
DTR Alarm Status
Diagnostic Messages
Lets you view the current DTR Alarm status.
Enables the Supervisory port to send out diagnostic messages upon power-up.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Enable
NOTICE: When in SCADA mode, these diagnostic messages disrupt the connected
device. Therefore, if using the SCADA mode, set this value to
“Disable.”
VT100 Interface
4-19
Current Pin Status
The Current Pin Status, which shows the state of the RS-232 pins, is also
displayed on the Supervisory interface screen.
Service Table Screen
The Service Table screen (Figure 4.16) displays the unit’s defined services
and the displays the Interface, Type, Pair, and Status parameters for each
service.
Figure 4.16 Service Table Screen
The Status for a particular service will display as one of the following:
•
Dead − The service is not functional because required resources are not
available.
•
Changed − The service parameter was changed and a Save and Restart is
required for the service to function.
•
Down − The service is not able to pass data because the physical layer is
down.
•
Physical Up − The service is not able to pass data because it has not
completed any required negotiations.
•
•
Up − The service is ready to pass data.
Idle − The service has nothing to do.
The Service Table screen displays the available services listed by Index
number. To view more detailed information about a service, navigate to one of
the Details screen (such as the Service Details screen described on page 4-23)
by selecting from and entry under the “Index” column (Service Details), the
<Interface> column (Interface Details), or <Type> column (Type Details). To
add a service, select the “Add Service prompt at the top of the screen.
Data Line Monitor Configuration Table
Select the Data Line Monitor prompt at the top of the Service Table screen to
view a screen that displays SCADA port information (Figure 4.17).
4-20
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 4.17 Data Line Monitor Config Table
Service Enable and
Disable
Tx/Rx Filter
Pattern Filter Enable
Pattern
Displays whether capture is Enabled or Disabled.
Displays the direction of the captured data.
Displays the Filter for the pattern being searched and captured.
Displays which specific pattern is being searched for.
Mask
Displays the bits the unit is looking for.
Offset
Displays the offset in the packet that matches the pattern.
You may view the captured data in the Packet Capture screen (Figure 4.18)
by selecting the prompt at the top of the Data Line Monitor screen. The
screen shows about 10 lines of active data, and if a line is selected, the screen
will display further decoded data below.
VT100 Interface
4-21
Figure 4.18 Packet Capture Screen
Mode
Buffer Management
The two modes available are “Analyze” and “Live.” The Live mode lets you
capture data and create a usable text file of the captured data. In Analyze
mode, the packet switch will return the data via the Data Line Monitor Packet
Table, whereas in the Live mode the Data Line Monitor Packet Table will
appear empty for SNMP calls.
Displays whether displayed data is set to “Wrap” or “Stop on Full.”
The Data Line Monitor Service Details screen (Figure 4.19) is displayed by
selecting the appropriate Services link on the Data Line Monitor Config Table
screen. You use this screen to define the parameters listed above.
Figure 4.19 Data Line Monitor Details Screen
4-22
WANsuite 5160/5130
Service Details Screen
From the Service Details screen, you can access and change the parameters
listed below. The new parameters are saved when you press the “Esc” key
and return to the previous screen.
Figure 4.20 Service Details Screen
Interface
Selecting one of the interfaces will bring up a screen where you can view
interface parameters. These screens are the same ones displayed when you
select a sub-menu from the Interfaces menu described earlier on page 4-7.
NOTICE: One of the Interface options is “Virtual.” PPP is the only service that may
be attached to the Virtual interface. You would choose the Virtual interface for
PPP if you elected to run PPP over Frame Relay. When you attach PPP to the
Virtual interface, you must supply an endpoint over which to send PPP
encapsulated data, and that endpoint must be for a Frame Relay DLCI.
Type
Selecting one of the services listed under the “Type” column will bring up a
screen where you can view (and, in some cases, change) parameters for each
type of service. The details displayed depend on the type of service (TDM,
PPP, Frame Relay, SCADA, IP, or tty) currently in effect. These screens are
shown and described below according to each type of service.
Pair
User-assigned integer field that specifies where to route the traffic from this
Service. If the Service is terminated by the unit, set this value to “0” (zero).
Select the “Delete Service” prompt to remove the currently configured service
identified by the Service Details screen. Deleting the selected service will
remove all references to this service.
After selecting “Delete Service,” you will be presented with a confirmation
screen similar to the one shown in Figure 4.5. Select “Yes” to confirm
removal of the selected service.
VT100 Interface
4-23
DS0 Monitor Details Screen (5160 Only)
To access the DS0 Monitor Details Screen (Figure 4.21), click on “TDM” in
the <Type> column on the Service Table screen. This screen lets you
configure what are considered high and low DS0 utilization parameters, and
will report alarms if the monitored statistics rise above or fall below those
specified settings. This helps determine customer load patterns so that channel
bandwidth can be reallocated as necessary.
Figure 4.21 DS0 Monitor Details Screen
Number of DS0s
Alarm Reset Timer
(sec)
Number of active DS0s (0−24) assigned on a per-service basis.
Number of seconds that an alarm condition must not be present before an
alarm is reset. Zero (0) indicates the Alarm Reset Timer is disabled.
Values: 0−900
Default: 30
High Utilization %
Lets you configure as a percent what is considered high utilization.
Values: 1−100
Default: 100
High Threshold (sec)
Lets you configure a high-utilization threshold (in seconds), above which an
alarm will report.
Values: 0−900
Default: 0 (Disabled)
End of Day Low
Utilization %
Lets you configure as a percent what is considered low utilization at the end
of the day. If the utilization is below this level when the day ends, an alarm
reports.
Values: 0−100
Default: 0 (Disabled)
DS0 Status and Alarm Table
Each second, the TDM services will count the number of active DS0s and
update their statistics. You must refresh your screen to view the updated
4-24
WANsuite 5160/5130
statistics. This table also gives the status of the alarms (OK, Alarmed) related
to DS0s.
The user-activated prompts listed below are at the bottom of the DS0 Monitor
Details screen.
Prompt
Function
Clear Alarms
Clears all utilization alarms.
Channels
Displays the Channel Table details for the Network 1,
Network 2, or Network services (Figure 4.22)
DS0 24 Hour History
Displays DS0 monitor history in 15-min buckets for the past
24 hours (Figure 4.23).
DS0 30 Day History
Displays DS0 monitor history in 24-hr buckets for the past 30
days (Figure 4.24).
Figure 4.22 Channel Table Details Screen
The Channel Table Details screen lets you establish the Rate, Service, and
Idle Pattern parameters for any available channel. The screen parameters are
described below.
Rate
The unit can operate at any data rate that is a multiple of 56 or 64 kbps.
Values: 56K, 64K
Default: 64K
Service
Idle Pattern
Specifies the service to which this channel is allocated. Refer to the Service
Table to see how the current services are configured.
Selects the DS0 idle pattern sent by the unit and lets the unit determine if the
DS0 idle pattern has been sent by the other end.
Values: 0−FF (Hex)
Default: 7F
VT100 Interface
4-25
Figure 4.23 DS0 Monitor 24 Hour History Screen
Figure 4.24 DS0 Monitor 30 Day History Screen
The DS0 Monitor 24 Hour History and 30 Day History screens show the
following statistics for the specified period.
Period
Period for which the DS0 monitor history is displayed.
Timestamp
System-up-time value during which the utilization historical period was
completed.
% Utilization of DS0(s)
Percent of DS0s utilized (−1, 0−100) over the period. A −1 indicates an
invalid value or unavailable data.
High Utilization (sec)
Number of seconds (0−900) greater than or equal to the high utilization
parameter specified for the period in the utilization alarm table.
Frame Relay Service Details Screen
Access the Frame Relay Service Details screen (Figure 4.25) by selecting
“Frame Relay” under the <Type> column on the Service Table screen.
4-26
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 4.25 Frame Relay Service Details Screen
The Frame Relay Service Details screen displays Service, Pair, and Interface
details across the top of the screen. Fields shown at the top of the Frame
Relay Service Details screen are described below.
Field
Description
Active
Read-only status (No, Yes)
LMI Type
Read-only status
FrameStart Status
Read-only status
Round Trip Delay
(bytes)
Specifies the frame size of packets making roundtrip.
Round Trip Rate (sec)
Specifies the rate at which Round Trip Delay
packets are sent.
Screen parameters that can be viewed and/or changed are listed below. To
save new parameters, press the “Esc” key.
Interface Type
If this service is connected to a Frame Relay network, the Interface Type
should be set to “UNI” as it is the user side of a User-to-Network interface. If
it is connected to a FRAD/router, the Interface Type should be set to “NI” as
it is the network side of a User-to-Network interface. If it is connected to an
equipment set for Network-to-Network interface, the Interface Type should be
set to “NNI.”
Values: UNI, NI, NNI
Default: UNI if interface is Network, NI if interface is Serial
Link Management
This parameter should be set to the link management used by the equipment
connected to it. If set to “Auto,” the unit will learn the link management type
and display it on the status portion of this screen.
VT100 Interface
4-27
Once it discovers the link management type, the unit should be set to the
discovered value so that subsequent unit or network re-initialization will be
faster.
Values: Auto, CCITT, ANSI, LMI, None
Default: ANSI
Max Frame Size
If Auto Diagnostic is set to “Yes,” the unit will discard received frames that
are larger than the maximum frame size. If Auto Diagnostic is set to “No,”
these large received frames will be sent, but will be counted in the Rx Invalid
statistics.
Values: 64–4096
Default: 2500
N1
Indicates the number of “keep alive” status inquiries that are sent between full
status requests.
Values: 5–255
Default: 5 if interface is Network (UNI), 6 if interface is Serial (NI).
N2
Specifies the total number of link reliability and protocol errors that can occur
during the sliding event monitor count defined by N3. If this count is
exceeded, the port is declared inactive.
Values: 1–255
Default: 3
N3
Represents a Monitored Events Count. For a network, a monitored event is
the receipt of a status inquiry message or the expiration of the polling
verification timer T2. For a FRAD, a monitored event is the transmission of a
status inquiry message. This parameter defines the size of the sliding window
used by the unit to determine whether a channel or user device is active.
Values: 5–255
Default: 4
T1
Specifies the number of seconds the unit waits between issuing status enquiry
messages.
Values: 5–30
Default: 10
Tx Threshold
Number of bits per second sent during a 15-minute interval after which a Tx
alarm will be triggered. A value of “0” (zero) disables this trap.
Values: 0–4294967295
Default: 0
Tx Alarm
4-28
Status of this alarm (OK, Alarmed).
WANsuite 5160/5130
Rx Threshold
Number of bits per second sent during a 15-minute interval after which an Rx
alarm will be triggered. A value of “0” (zero) disables this trap.
Values: 0–4294967295
Default: 0
Rx Alarm
Default CIR (bps)
Status of this alarm (OK, Alarmed).
The Committed Information Rate (in bits per second) provided by your frame
relay service provider. The unit will apply this value to each DLCI learned
from the network side to gather statistics and to perform CIR enforcement, if
required. If a DLCI is configured with a CIR different from the default, the
DLCI configuration will be used instead.
Values: 0–1536000
Default: 0
Default Be Rate (bps)
The Excess Burst Rate (in bits per second) provided by your frame relay
service provider. The unit will apply this value to each DLCI learned from the
network side to gather statistics and to perform CIR enforcement, if required.
If a DLCI is configured with an Excess Burst different from the default, the
DLCI configuration will be used instead.
Values: 0–1536000
Default: 0
Enforce CIR and Be
If this parameter is set to “Yes,” the unit will enforce Committed Information
Rate and Excess Burst.
Values: No, Yes
Default: No
NOTICE: The Auto Diagnostic parameter must be set to “Yes” to enforce CIR and
Be.
Management DLCI
If this parameter is set to “0,” the unit will look for management traffic on
any DLCI. If set to a number associated with a specific DLCI, the unit will
look for management traffic on that DLCI only.
Management Auto IP
DLCI
If this parameter is set to “Yes,” the unit will monitor the specified DLCI for
5 pings over 5 seconds, after which the unit uses the destination address as its
management IP address.
FrameStart Auto
Diagnostic
When this parameter is set to “Yes,” the unit will always source LMI on both
sides of the frame relay connection. The unit will dynamically learn the type
of link management used on each side of the connection (Network and
Serial).
When set to “No,” the unit will forward each LMI message to its service pair.
If one side of the pair goes down, the other side will stop receiving LMI.
VT100 Interface
4-29
FrameStart Auto Diagnostic mode should be left set to “Yes” unless the frame
relay connection has more that 128 DLCIs, or if there is a very high traffic
rate on a constant basis.
Values: No, Yes
Default: Yes
FrameStart Auto
Discovery
When this parameter is set to “Yes,” the unit will send FrameStart discovery
and delay frames to each DLCI it learns as soon as the DLCIs are set active.
This is required to calculate round-trip delay as well as to discover remote
WANsuite 5160/5130/FSE units. This parameter should be set to “Yes” only
on network services that have a WANsuite 5160/5130/FSE at the far end of
the frame relay connection.
Values: No, Yes
Default: No
Normal Tx Queue Size
Each Frame Relay service has two distinct transmit queues: one for normalpriority traffic and one for high-priority traffic. At this time, only SCADA and
TCP Server traffic are considered high-priority and are placed in the highpriority queue. All other types of traffic are placed in the normal-priority
queue.
This parameter defines how many normal priority frames can be put in front
of a high-priority frame. The software always checks for high-priority frames
before placing normal-priority frames in the transmit queue. However, once
the frames are in the hardware transmit queue, their order of transmission
cannot be changed.
If SCADA and/or TCP Server are not up, set this parameter to 28 (the
default). If SCADA and/or TCP Server are up, set this parameter according to
the SCADA host system’s ability to support higher latency. For example, if a
SCADA host system has a timeout of 500 ms when polling remote devices
through a DDS Frame Relay service, the Normal Tx Queue Size parameter
should be set to 2. This would allow two 1500-byte IP frames to be sent
between SCADA frames without reaching the 500-ms limit. If the SCADA
host application has a timeout lower than 500 ms, this parameter should be set
to 1. This then ensures a minimum latency for SCADA applications.
However, it will slow IP traffic since only one IP frame at a time can be
placed in the hardware transmit queue.
RFC1315 Trap
When this parameter is set to “Enable,” the unit will send the standard
RFC1315 frame relay DTE circuit state change trap every time a DLCI
changes state, provided at least one destination IP address for trap is
configured in the SNMP configuration.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
Rx Invalid Threshold
Number of invalid frames received during a 15-minute interval after which an
Rx invalid alarm will be triggered. A value of “0” (zero) disables this trap.
Values: 0–4294967295
Default: 0
4-30
WANsuite 5160/5130
Rx Invalid Alarm
Status of this alarm (OK, Alarmed).
User prompts at the bottom of the Frame Relay Services Details screen are
described in the following table.
Prompt
Function
Frame Relay
Statistics
Opens the Frame Relay Statistics screen for the current frame
relay service.
Clear Alarms
Clears all Frame Relay alarms.
Pair Type Details
Opens another Frame Relay Service Details screen that reverses
the service and the pair so that you can view both sides of the
pair.
DLCI Table
Opens the DLCI Table screen, which displays all the DLCIs on
the current service. Refer to DLCI Table Screen on page 4-49 for
more information.
Frame Relay Statistics Screen
Select the “Frame Relay Statistics” prompt to bring up a table (Figure 4.26)
that reports on the status and condition of LMI parameters and on Receive/
Transmit alarms and thresholds. Alarm threshold levels may be changed by
entering a new threshold value in the appropriate field on the Frame Relay
Service Details screen and pressing the “Esc” key.
Figure 4.26 Frame Relay Statistics Screen
To view the Port Statistics (Figure 4.27) for a specific interval, select that
interval from the Frame Relay Statistics <Period> column.
VT100 Interface
4-31
Figure 4.27 Frame Relay Port Statistics Screen
Transmit
Frames
Number of frames transmitted by the port.
Octets
Number of octets transmitted by the port.
Mgmt Frames
Number of management frames transmitted by the port.
Mgmt Octets
Number of management octets transmitted by the port.
Stat Inquiries
Number of octets transmitted in frame relay LMI status inquiries.
Stat Responses
Number of octets transmitted in frame relay LMI status responses.
Receive
Frames
Number of frames received by the port.
Octets
Number of octets received by the port.
Mgmt Frames
Number of management frames received by the port.
Mgmt Octets
Number of management octets received by the port.
FECN
Number of Forward Explicit Congestion Notification frames received.
BECN
Number of Backward Explicit Congestion Notification frames received.
Invalids
Stat Inquiries
Number of octets received in frame relay LMI status inquiries.
Stat Responses
Number of octets received in frame relay LMI status responses.
Invalid LMIs
4-32
Number of invalid frames received.
Number of invalid Local Management Interface frames received.
WANsuite 5160/5130
Throughput (bits/sec)
Peak
Average
Period Index
Peak bandwidth (in bps) as measured over a 10-second period.
Average bandwidth (in bps) used by the port.
Selects the interval (Current, Summary, or 1-96) to be viewed on the Frame
Relay Port Statistics screen.
PPP Service Details Screen
The PPP Service Details screen (Figure 4.28) gives you access to
configuration parameters that can be viewed/changed as described in the
following paragraphs. To save new parameters, press the “Esc” key.
Figure 4.28 PPP Service Details Screen
ACCM
The Asynchronous Control Character Map (ACCM) configuration option
provides a method to negotiate the use of control character transparency on
asynchronous links.
Values: 0–FFFFFFFF (Hex)
Default: FFFFFFFF
MRU
The Maximum Receive Units (MRU) configuration option may be set to
inform the peer that the implementation can receive larger packets, or to
request that the peer send smaller packets.
Values: 128–4096
Default: 1500
Port IP Address
The IP Address of the port. For unnumbered PPP link, set to 0.0.0.0 and set
IP Address Negotiation to “No.”
Default: 192.168.1.2
Peer IP Address
Enter the IP address of the peer that will negotiate authentication protocols.
Default: 192.168.1.3
VT100 Interface
4-33
Virtual PPP Over
Endpoint name over which to send PPP encapsulated data (i.e., PPP over
Frame Relay). Valid only when the PPP interface is Virtual.
Auth Challenge
Interval
The time interval (in seconds) between CHAP challenges. A value of “0”
(zero) disables the periodic authentication challenge.
Values: 0−3600
Default: 0 (disabled)
Allow PAP
This parameter lets the peer negotiate for PAP.
Values: No, Yes
Default: No
Allow CHAP
This parameter lets the peer negotiate for CHAP.
Values: No, Yes
Default: No
PAP Username
Type the appropriate PAP Username in this field to log on to the peer.
Values: (User Established)
Default: Username
PAP Password
Enter the password necessary to log on to the peer under a given PAP
Username.
Values: (User Established)
Default: (None)
CHAP Username
Type the appropriate CHAP Hostname in this field to challenge the peer.
Values: (User Established)
Default: Hostname
CHAP Secret
Enter the Secret (i.e., password) necessary to challenge the peer.
Values: (User Established)
Default: Secret
Initiate Negotiation
Determines whether the port actively negotiates with the peer site or passively
waits for negotiation requests.
Values: Yes, No
Default: Yes
Parameters to Negotiate
The table displayed near the bottom of the PPP Service Details screen shows
which parameters are set to be negotiated. You can specify which parameters
4-34
WANsuite 5160/5130
should be negotiated by selecting the desired option. The table below
describes the parameters that can be negotiated.
Parameter
Description
Protocol Header
Compression
Compresses PPP protocol headers.
Default = Yes
IPCP Compression
Compresses TCP headers using Van Jacobsen compression.
Default = Yes
MRU
Informs the peer that the implementation can receive larger
packets, or requests that the peer send smaller packets.
Default = Yes
HDLC Address
Compression
Negotiates the compression of high-level data link control
(HDLC) addresses.
Default = Yes
IP Address
Dynamically negotiates for IP addresses; otherwise, it is
assumed both sides know each other’s IP addresses.
Default = Yes
ACCM
Negotiates the use of control character transparency on
asynchronous links.
Default = Yes
Magic Number
Unique numbers useful for detecting loopbacks.
Default = Yes
PAP
Authentication scheme used by PPP servers to validate the
identity of the originator of the connection.
Default = No
CHAP
Authentication scheme used by PPP servers to validate the
identity of the originator of the connection upon connection or at
any later time.
Default = No
PPP Statistics
Selecting the “PPP Statistics” prompt brings up a table (Figure 4.29) that
reports on traffic.
VT100 Interface
4-35
Figure 4.29 PPP Statistics Screen
Period
Selects the interval (Current, Summary, or numbered Interval) to be viewed
on the PPP Statistics screen.
Tx Frames
Number of frames transmitted by the port.
Tx Octets
Number of octets transmitted by the port.
Rx Frames
Number of frames received by the port.
Rx Octets
Number of octets received by the port.
Average
Peak
Average bandwidth (in bps) used by the port.
Peak bandwidth (in bps) as measured over a 10-second period.
PAP Table
At the bottom of the PPP Services Details screen are prompts that, if selected,
display tables for PAP and CHAP details. The PAP Table (Figure 4.30)
displays the Usernames and Passwords for 10 entries.
4-36
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 4.30 PAP Table Screen
PAP Details Screen
To change the Username and Password for a selected PAP Index, access the
PAP Details screen by selecting the applicable Index number in the PAP
Table. Enter the new information in the appropriate field(s) and press the
“Esc” key.
To delete the Username and Password for a selected PAP Index, delete the
character string displayed in both fields (leaving them blank) and press the
“Esc” key.
Figure 4.31 PAP Details Screen
CHAP Table and Details Screens
From the PPP Service Details screen, select “CHAP Table” to view a table of
the CHAP Username and Secret information for each of 10 entries. This table
and its Details screen look the same as the PAP Table and Details screens.
VT100 Interface
4-37
Choose an Index number to bring up a screen in which you can change the
Username and Secret information for that particular CHAP Index.
To change the Username and Secret for a selected CHAP Index, enter the new
information in the appropriate field(s) and press the “Esc” key.
SCADA Service Details Screen
NOTICE: SCADA traffic has a higher priority than other types of traffic flowing
through the unit. Refer to Normal Tx Queue Size on page 4-30 for more
details.
The SCADA Service Details (Figure 4.32) screen lets you access and read or
change the parameters listed below.
Figure 4.32 SCADA Service Details Screen
Message Size
Maximum number of octets to buffer before sending a frame.
Values: 0−1024
Default: 256
Idle Character Delay
Maximum number of idle character time required before sending a frame.
Values: 0−65535
Default: 0
Input Terminator
Decimal value of the character that terminates a message before sending a
frame.
Values: 0−255
Default: 0
Data Direction
Data direction that the port will support. If set to “Input,” the port will only
accept incoming data and will not transmit data. If set to “Output,” the port
will ignore any incoming data. If set to “Both,” the port will process all data.
Values: Input, Output, Both
Default: Both
4-38
WANsuite 5160/5130
SCADA Loopback
Determines if and where SCADA will loopback received data.
Values: None, Loopback to Network, Loopback to Port
Default: None
The table below these parameters displays the SCADA statistics. You can
clear all SCADA statistics by selecting the “SCADA Clear Statistics” prompt
at the bottom of the screen.
Select the “SCADA Device List” prompt to bring up a screen that shows the
mapping between SCADA devices and endpoints (Figure 4.33).
Figure 4.33 SCADA Device List
Press “Enter” after selecting the device number to display the SCADA Device
Details (Figure 4.34) menu that lets you map SCADA devices to endpoints.
Figure 4.34 SCADA Device Details
VT100 Interface
4-39
IP Service Details Screen
The IP Service Details screen (Figure 4.12), accessed by selecting “IP” from
the <Type> column in the IP Service screen, lets you configure the IP
parameters described on page 4-17.
To change any of the available parameters, you must enter new values in the
appropriate field(s) and press the “Esc” key to save your changes.
NOTICE: To use newly established IP parameters, you must “Save and Restart.”
(See "Save and Restart" on page 4-6.)
Applications
Select “Applications” in the Main Menu screen to display the various
WANsuite 5160/5130 applications (Figure 4.35) associated with configuration
tables and statistics for Layer 3 and above that do not map to a specific
service or interface.
Figure 4.35 Applications Screen
Endpoint Table Screen
The Endpoint Table (Figure 4.36) describes all endpoints terminating in the
unit; user-selectable prompts are provided to view the Endpoint Details,
Endpoint Service Details, and DLCI Details screens. The unit will
automatically learn all DLCIs from the network side and relay that
information on the serial side with default values.
4-40
WANsuite 5160/5130
The Endpoint Table and its corresponding DLCIs will be saved in the
configuration database either when you perform a “Save and Restart” or
automatically every 15 minutes.
NOTICE: The Endpoint Table and its corresponding DLCIs will be saved in the
configuration database only after at least one endpoint parameter has
been changed and submitted in the Endpoint Details Screen on
page 4-42. When in IP Gateway, if you decide to use a “discovered”
endpoint, you must rename it. A discovered endpoint cannot be used
elsewhere (i.e., IP Gateway) until it has been renamed. Also, it will not
be saved in the configuration database.
NOTICE: Endpoint names of the form PPP-Sn and SCADA-Sn are reserved by the
system. These system-generated endpoints cannot be modified.
Figure 4.36 Endpoint Table Screen
You can add an endpoint in the Add Endpoint field and, when the screen
refreshes, you will be able to view that endpoint’s associated parameters. For
most applications, you will not have to modify the Endpoint Table and DLCI
Table.
Endpoint Details Screen
Select the <NDX> number to view the Endpoint Details screen (Figure 4.37),
which provides you with access to the configuration parameters described
below.
VT100 Interface
4-41
Figure 4.37 Endpoint Details Screen
Name
When the unit learns a new DLCI, it creates an endpoint entry and a DLCI
entry if they are not already configured. The endpoint’s Name will
automatically be assigned as “Dynamic”; however, this name can (and most
likely should) be changed to reflect a remote location name. Submitting a
changed Name parameter will cause the endpoint entry and its corresponding
DLCI entry to be saved in the configuration database.
Value: A string of up to 11 characters
Default: None
CAUTION: When configuring endpoints, the name you assign each endpoint in
the Name parameter field must be unique within the unit.
Service
The Service Index number (from the Service Table) on which this DLCI was
found or configured.
Values: Displays the currently active Services (by Index number) or the
Service(s) on which the DLCI was discovered.
Default: 0
DLCI
The DLCI number.
Values: 16–1023
Default: 0
Forward Endpoint
By default, each DLCI is switched to its pair service in the Service Table
using the same DLCI number. If this endpoint has to be switched to a
different DLCI or a different service, the endpoint index of the destination
must be configured here.
For most applications, you will not need to set this parameter.
Values: 0–256
Default: 0
4-42
WANsuite 5160/5130
Backup Endpoint
If this DLCI has an alternative endpoint to switch to in case this DLCI
becomes inactive, you would configure the endpoint index of this alternate
endpoint here.
For most applications, you will not need to set this parameter.
Values: 0–256
Default: 0
SLP Reference
Endpoint
Use this reference endpoint index for the SLA parameters. As most
applications have the same SLAs for all DLCIs, they only need to be
configured in one DLCI entry. You can then copy all SLA parameters from
the endpoint index of this configured DLCI. If no SLP reference endpoint is
configured and the DLCI SLA parameters are not configured, the values in
the Frame Relay Service Details will be used (default CIR, Be, enforcement).
For most applications, you will not need to set this parameter.
Values: 0–256
Default: 0
Remote IP Address
If this WANsuite 5160/5130 unit is to be used to manage a remote
WANsuite 5160/5130 unit, you must configure the IP address of the remote
WANsuite 5160/5130 unit here. This DLCI can be used for management only,
or for management and actual data.
If this parameter is set, a PC connected to the LAN interface of this
WANsuite 5160/5130 can reach a remote WANsuite 5160/5130 through this
DLCI. The remote IP address must be part of an IP network that is different
from the local WANsuite 5160/5130, and the local WANsuite 5160/5130's IP
address must be configured into the PC. This way, local and remote
WANsuite 5160/5130s can be reached regardless of the availability of the
routers connected at the back of the WANsuite 5160/5130s.
Values: IP address
Default: 0.0.0.0
Remote IP Mask
If the Remote IP Address is set, the Remote IP Mask must also be set.
Values: IP address
Default: 0.0.0.0
Type
If data received from this DLCI has to be switched to its corresponding
destination port, you must set the type to “Switched.” Set the type to “Local”
if this DLCI will be used for management purposes only.
Values: Switched, Local
Default: Switched
Delete Endpoint
You may delete any endpoint.
VT100 Interface
4-43
Endpoint Service Details Screen
Selecting from the <Svc> column on the Endpoint Table screen displays the
typical Service Details screen (page 4-23) in which you can view, and in some
cases change, parameters including Index, Interface, Type, and Pair. A “Delete
Service” prompt is also included on this screen.
DLCI Details Screen
The DLCI Details screen (Figure 4.38) lets you access the configuration
parameters described in the following paragraphs. To bring up this screen,
select any DLCI from the <DLCI> column on the Endpoint Table screen.
Figure 4.38 DLCI Details Screen
The unit uses the first three configuration parameters (Protocol Encapsulation,
Proprietary Traffic Type, and Proprietary Offset) to gather statistics. For inband management, “RFC 1490” must be the encapsulation method.
Protocol Encapsulation
The type of encapsulation used by the FRAD/router connected to the unit.
Values: RFC 1490, Proprietary
Default: RFC 1490
Proprietary Traffic
Type
When Protocol Encapsulation is set for “Proprietary,” the Proprietary Traffic
Type parameter defines which protocol is encapsulated.
Values: IP, IPX, Ethertype, None
Default: None
Proprietary Offset
When Protocol Encapsulation is set for “Proprietary,” the Proprietary Offset
parameter defines the number of octets after the frame relay header where the
proprietary traffic type starts.
Values: 0–64
Default: 0
4-44
WANsuite 5160/5130
CIR (bps)
If a Committed Information Rate is configured here, its value (in bits per
second) will be used instead of the default CIR of the frame relay service.
Values: 0–1536000
Default: 0
Be (bps)
If an Excess Burst Rate is configured here, its value (in bits per second) will
be used instead of the default excess burst of the frame relay service.
Values: 0–1536000
Default: 0
Bc (bps)
If CIR enforcement is configured to “Yes,” the unit will throttle the
Committed Burst down to this value (in bits per second) when frames are
received with the BECN bit set.
Values: 0–1536000
Default: 0
Discard Eligible Flag
If this parameter is set to “Yes,” and CIR enforcement is also set to “Yes,” the
unit will set the Discard Eligible (DE) bit for frames sent over CIR.
Values: Yes, No
Default: No
In Band Management
If the unit is to be used as a gateway to reach a remote WANsuite 5160/5130
through this DLCI, set this parameter to “Yes,” and configure the remote IP
address and Mask in the corresponding endpoint.
Values: Yes, No
Default: No
FrameStart Delay
If this parameter is set to “Enable,” the unit will send FrameStart discovery
and delay frames on this DLCI, and will report the state of the remote
Verilink unit. It will also send SOS frames when the FRAD/router connected
to this unit goes inactive.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Enable if Auto Discovery is set to “Yes”; otherwise Disable
FrameStart Status
If the remote unit is a Verilink unit with FrameStart technology and
FrameStart Auto Discovery is enabled, the FrameStart Status field will show
the status of the remote unit. The status is “Active” if both the local and
remote DLCIs are active and the remote unit answers to the discovery frames
sent by this unit. The status is “SOS” if the remote unit is active but the
FRAD/router connected to it is inactive. The status is “Inactive” in all other
cases.
Values: Active, Inactive, SOS
Default: Inactive
VT100 Interface
4-45
Remote DLCI
If the remote unit is a Verilink unit with FrameStart technology, and
FrameStart Auto Discovery is enabled, this field displays the DLCI number
used on the remote end of this DLCI.
Values: 16−1023
Default: 0
Remote Unit
If the remote unit is a Verilink unit with FrameStart technology, and
FrameStart Auto Discovery is enabled, this field displays the first three digits
of the unit ID configured on the remote end of this DLCI.
Values: 000−999
Default: 000
Remote IP Address
Round Trip Delay
Round Trip Rate
Displays the IP address of the remote Verilink unit with FrameStart
technology if FrameStart Auto Discovery is enabled.
Specifies the frame size (in bytes) of packets making round-trip.
Specifies the rate (in seconds) at which Round Trip Delay packets are sent.
DLCI Status Table
The bottom portion of the screen shows a table detailing the actual status of
this DLCI and alarm threshold information as follows:
Status
If this DLCI is up, the status will be “Active”; otherwise, the status will be
“Inactive.”
Values: Active, Inactive
Default: Inactive
Receiving FECN/
BECN
When a frame is received with congestion bit set, this parameter is set to
“Yes.” It is set back to “No” when a frame is received without congestion bit
set.
Values: Yes, No
Default: No
CIR Threshold
CIR Alarm
Bits Over Be Threshold
Bits Over Be Alarm
4-46
Sets the Tx over CIR alarm threshold. This threshold is the number of bits per
second in excess of CIR during a 15-minute interval. Setting this field to “0”
(zero) disables the alarm.
Reports if the Tx over CIR threshold has been exceeded.
Sets the Tx over Be alarm threshold. This threshold is the number of bits per
second in excess of CIR + Be during a 15-minute interval. Setting this field to
“0” (zero) disables the alarm.
Reports if the Tx over Be threshold has been exceeded.
WANsuite 5160/5130
Congestion Threshold
Congestion Alarm
BECN in CIR
UAS Threshold
UAS Alarm
Sets the Rx Congestion alarm threshold. This threshold is the number of
frames received with BECN/FECN. Setting this field to “0” (zero) disables
the alarm.
Reports if the Rx Congestion threshold has been exceeded.
Reports if Backward Explicit Congestion Notification (BECN) has been
received within CIR.
Sets the Unavailable Seconds (UAS) alarm threshold. This threshold is the
number of seconds after which the DLCI is unavailable. Setting this field to
“0” (zero) disables the alarm.
Reports if the UAS threshold has been exceeded.
DLCI Statistics Screen
Selecting “DLCI Statistics” on the DLCI Details screen will display the screen
shown in Figure 4.39.
Figure 4.39 DLCI Statistics Screen
This screen displays all ninety-six 15-minute buckets available for DLCI
statistics. If the unit is powered on at 01:00 PM, the first interval will be
completed at 01:15 PM; subsequent intervals would be completed at xx:30,
xx:45, xx:00 and xx:15. Interval 1 is always the latest (most recent) interval,
and interval 96 will always be the oldest.
The first row of the DLCI Statistics screen shows a summary that includes all
96 buckets. You can choose to see the statistics for any given bucket by
selecting the desired <Period> and pressing the “Enter” key, which displays
the DLCI Statistics Details screen. The MIB (ipadv2.mib) describes each
available statistic.
VT100 Interface
4-47
DLCI Statistics Details Screen
Select from the <Period> column to display the DLCI Statistics Details screen
(Figure 4.40) for a specific period or interval. The parameters on this screen
are described below.
Figure 4.40 DLCI Statistics Details Screen
The DLCI Statistics screen in the preceding figure shows a summary that
includes all 96 buckets. You can choose to see the statistics for any given
bucket by selecting a specific interval under the <Period> column on the
DLCI Statistics screen. The MIB (ipadv2.mib) describes each available
statistic. “FDR” on the screen above refers to Frame Delivery Ratio, which is
the ration of successful frame receptions to attempted frame transmissions.
“DDR” refers to Data Delivery Ratio or the ratio of successful payload bytes
received to attempted payload bytes transmitted. “DE,” or Discard Eligible,
refers to the data that is first eligible to be discarded when network congestion
occurs.
DLCI Table Screen
You can access the DLCI Table screen from the Frame Relay Service Details
Screen shown on page 4-27. The DLCI Table screen displays a table of all
DLCIs on a specific frame relay service along with their state and alarm
conditions.
4-48
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 4.41 DLCI Table Screen
Service Aware Screen
The Service Aware function recognizes IP traffic and counts the number of
frames and bytes passed for a specific service based on filters by DLCI, by IP
Address, and by IP Port. Each row of the Service Aware table represents a
specific set of filter parameters known as a “rule.” Each rule is established
through the Rule Config screen, which is accessed by selecting “Rule
Details.”
The Service Aware screen (Figure 4.42) provides a table showing these
filtered packet counts for up to 10 rules. This table indicates which Service
Aware filters are enabled or disabled, and shows the specific DLCI, IP
Address, and IP Port by which the IP traffic is filtered. In addition, this table
shows the Tx Alarm Threshold and the current Tx Alarm status (if enabled)
for each rule.
It is also possible to filter PPP services, in which case all information related
to DLCIs is ignored.
Figure 4.42 Service Aware Screen
VT100 Interface
4-49
Rule Configuration Screen
Select from the <Ndx> column to bring up the Rule Config screen (Figure
4.43) to establish Service Aware parameters. To establish a rule, select the
desired rule configuration options, provide the appropriate filter information
where required, and press the “Esc” key.
Figure 4.43 Rule Config Screen
The paragraphs below describe the rule configuration parameters and their
options.
Service
Selects the service to which the rule applies.
NOTICE: If you change the Service parameter, you must press the “Enter” key to
see the appropriate DLCIs.
DLCI
Filter By DLCI
Selects the DLCI to which the rule applies.
Enables or disables filtering of the IP traffic in accordance with the previously
specified DLCI.
NOTICE: To use this filter, you must specify both the Service and DLCI
parameters in the rule configuration.
IP Address
IP Mask
4-50
Establishes the IP address by which the rule will filter IP traffic (if enabled).
Represents a range of IP addresses defined so that only machines with IP
addresses within the range defined by the mask are allowed to access an
Internet service. To mask a portion of the IP address, replace it with the wild
card character “0” (zero). (For example, 192.44.0.0 represents every computer
on the Internet with an IP address beginning with 192.44.)
WANsuite 5160/5130
Filter By IP Address
Enter IP Port or Select
From List
Enables or disables filtering of the IP traffic by the IP address specified in the
IP Address or IP Mask field.
Establishes the IP port by which the rule will filter IP traffic (if enabled).
Filter By IP Port
Enables or disables filtering of the IP traffic by the IP port specified in the IP
Port field.
Tx Alarm Threshold
Specifies the threshold in bits per second for the Transmit Alarm on this rule.
Tx Alarm
Shows the current Transmit Alarm status.
Traffic Meter Statistics Screen
The Traffic Meter Statistics screen (Figure 4.44), which can be accessed from
the bottom of the Rule Config screen, displays the number of frames and
octets sent over a DLCI that have been counted in accordance with the
Service Aware “rule” that has been established for a Service. As such, it is
frame relay specific (i.e., DLCIs only occur in frame relay links). In addition,
this screen provides data rate performance information for the period of time
you have specified in the Period field (see below).
Figure 4.44 Traffic Meter Statistics Screen
The Traffic Meter Statistics screen reports on the following parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tx Frames
Tx Octets
Rx Frames
Rx Octets
Rate Peak – the peak data rate for the viewed period (see below)
Rate Average – the average data rate for the viewed period (see below)
VT100 Interface
4-51
The <Period> field defines the interval for which the Traffic Meter statistics
are reported as listed below.
Summary
Current
Interval 1,
Interval 2,...,
Interval 96
Represents the past 24 hours; reports the additive number of frames/octets, the
highest peak encountered for 24 hours, and the average for 24 hours.
Reports on the current 15-minute interval.
Reports on Intervals 1-96, which correspond to the periods completed 15
minutes ago, 30 minutes ago,..., 24 hours ago.
SNMP Details Screen
The unit detects and reports T1 network alarms and provides several options
for reporting them, one of which is SNMP traps. When a network alarm
occurs, the unit sends a trap message to as many as eight destinations on your
network. The unit will report each alarm by transmitting an SNMP “trap” to
each non-zero Trap IP address.
The SNMP Details screen (Figure 4.45) lets you configure the SNMP
parameters described in the paragraphs below.
Figure 4.45 SNMP Details Screen
4-52
Read Community
Accepts a character string identifying the group authorized to perform read
operations. The default setting is “Public.”
Write Community
Accepts a character string identifying the group authorized to perform write
operations. The default setting is “Private.”
Trap Community
Accepts a character string, which is included in SNMP traps generated by the
unit. The default setting is “Public.”
Trap IP Address
Accepts the IP address of a network device where alarm reporting traps are to
be sent.
WANsuite 5160/5130
Diagnostics Screen
The Diagnostics screen (Figure 4.46) provides a table for viewing the current
settings for the test and maintenance functions performed on the available
interfaces. This screen shows an upper-level view of all the interfaces so you
can see if any port is under test, and if so, view the results. You may change
Diagnostic parameters on the Test Details screen (Figure 4.47), which is
accessed by selecting the appropriate interface under the <Description>
column. The properties of the Diagnostics table are described in the
paragraphs below.
Figure 4.46 Diagnostics Screen
Description
Loop Type
Describes the type of interface selected for testing.
Describes the type of loop test (if any) performed on the selected interface.
Setting
Displays the bandwidth on which you wish to perform the BERT.
Pattern
Specifies the pattern to be transmitted during a BERT for the selected port.
Length
Displays the length of time for which the BERT should run for the selected
interface.
State
Displays the current BERT state for the selected interface.
Test Details Screens
The Test Details screens let you set some test parameters and view other readonly parameters. These screens are also used to initiate a BERT or Loop Test.
The Network Interface Test Details screen is shown in Figure 4.47, and its
parameters are described below the figure. The Serial Interface Test Details
screen is shown in Figure 4.48, followed by a description of its parameters.
VT100 Interface
4-53
Figure 4.47 Network Interface Test Details Screen
BERT Table on Network Interface Test Details Screen
The BERT table lets you set the test parameters listed below.
Setting
Displays the bandwidth on which you wish to perform the BERT. The
available values for this parameter depend on which interface is selected.
Values: Net, Use Service, Idle, Channel 1...24
Default: Net
BERT Pattern
Specifies the pattern to be transmitted during a test for the selected port.
Values: Marks, QRSS, 511, 2047, 2 15, Spaces
Default: QRSS
NOTICE: The 215 pattern is the ITU (European) version, not the ANSI version.
Test Duration
Specifies the length of time for which the test should run for the selected port.
Values: 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 24 hours, Continuous
Default: 15 minutes
From this screen, you can also view the following read-only parameters:
Service Index
Rate
Selects the channels with a service to BERT. (Refer to the Service Table
Screen shown on page 4-20.)
Sets the bit rate to BERT for each selected channel. If “Νx64K” is selected,
the ones density requirements of the T1 network line must be ensured. If
“Νx56K” is selected, ones density for the selected DS0 channel is maintained.
Values: Nx56K, Nx64K
Default: Nx64K
Pattern Sync
4-54
Displays the state of pattern sync during a test. If no test is in progress, “No
Test” is displayed. If a test is active, but the receiver is not in pattern sync,
WANsuite 5160/5130
“No Sync” is displayed. If the receiver is in pattern sync, “In Sync” is
displayed.
Elapsed Time
Displays the time elapsed since a timed test began or, if completed, the total
test time.
Bit Errors
Displays the total number of bit errors detected since the test began or since
error statistics were cleared.
Errored Seconds
%EFS
Displays the number of asynchronous errored seconds that have been detected
since the test began or since error statistics were last cleared.
Displays the percentage of time that the test ran error-free. This ratio is
derived from the number of error-free seconds divided by the number of
seconds accumulated in Elapsed Time.
Loop Table on Network Interface Test Details Screen
The Loop table lets you specify the type of Loop test to be performed. The
types of tests available for you to choose from depend on the currently
selected interface. Loopback diagrams are shown in Appendix A, Figure A.1.
Values: No Test (Loop Down), payload loopback (PLB), line loopback
(LLB), maintenance loopback (MLB), Far PLB, and Far LLB
Default: No Test (Loop Down)
Figure 4.48 Serial Interface Test Details Screen
BERT Table on Serial Interface Test Details Screen
The BERT table lets you set the test parameters listed below.
Setting
Displays the bandwidth on which you wish to perform the BERT. The
available values for this parameter depend on which interface is selected.
Values: Net, DTE
Default: Net
VT100 Interface
4-55
BERT Pattern
Specifies the pattern to be transmitted during a test for the selected port.
Values: Marks, QRSS, 511, 2047, 2 15, Spaces
Default: QRSS
NOTICE: The 215 pattern is the ITU (European) version, not the ANSI version.
Test Duration
Specifies the length of time for which the test should run for the selected port.
Values: 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 24 hours, Continuous
Default: 15 minutes
You can also view the following read-only parameters from this screen:
Pattern Sync
Displays the state of pattern sync during a test. If no test is in progress, “No
Test” is displayed. If a test is active, but the receiver is not in pattern sync,
“No Sync” is displayed. If the receiver is in pattern sync, “In Sync” is
displayed.
Elapsed Time
Displays the time elapsed since a timed test began or, if completed, the total
test time.
Bit Errors
Displays the total number of bit errors detected since the test began or since
error statistics were cleared.
Errored Seconds
%EFS
Displays the number of asynchronous errored seconds that have been detected
since the test began or since error statistics were last cleared.
Displays the percentage of time the test ran error-free. This ratio is derived
from the number of error free seconds divided by the number of seconds
accumulated in Elapsed Time.
Loop Table on Serial Interface Test Details Screen
The Loop table lets you specify the type of Loop test to be performed. The
types of tests available for you to choose from depend on the currently
selected interface. Loopback diagrams are shown in Appendix A, Figure A.1.
Values: No Test, Port Loop, V.54 Loop, Far V.54 Loop
Default: No Test (Loop Down)
The Test Details screens provide the following user-selectable prompts:
4-56
Prompt
Function
Start BERT
Starts the specified BERT.
Stop BERT
Stops the currently running BERT.
Error Inject
Injects a bit error.
Reset Errors
Resets the current error count.
WANsuite 5160/5130
Trap Log Screen
The Trap Log screen (Figure 4.49) shows a collection of all the traps that
have been generated. A trap is a mechanism that permits a device to send an
alarm for certain network events to an SNMP management station.
The table shown in this screen lists each trap by its Index number, and
displays the type of error captured by the trap (Trap Number) and the date and
time that the trap was stored (Time Stamp).
Figure 4.49 Trap Log Screen
Top Talkers Screen
Selecting “Top Talkers” displays the Top Talkers screen (Figure 4.50), which
is used to set parameters for and initiate the generation of a list of IP
addresses ranked in terms of the number of frames and octets they have
transmitted during a specified reporting period. This report allows MIS
managers to determine who is generating the most traffic on a WAN based on
IP addresses.
Figure 4.50 Top Talkers Screen
VT100 Interface
4-57
To generate a Top Talkers report, enter the duration parameters and desired
report size in the available fields as described below, and then press the
“Enter” key or select the “Start” prompt on the screen.
Duration
Requested Report Size
Establishes the amount of time (in seconds) for which the Top Talkers report
will capture IP traffic; typically this value is 900 seconds (15 minutes).
Establishes how many IP addresses will be reported as the “Top Talkers.”
NOTICE: While you may request any number, the unit is internally limited to a
maximum report size of 20.
As soon as you initiate generation of a report by pressing the “Enter” key or
selecting the “Start” prompt, the Duration value is copied over to the Time
Remaining field. When the specified Duration for the report has elapsed, the
resulting report-specific information will be displayed on the right side of the
screen. This report comprises elements as defined below.
Report #
Size
Start Time
System Up Time
Displays a unique number used to identify the generated report. This number
is generated automatically, is incremented sequentially for each report, and
can be used by management stations for automatic polling (via the
ipadv2.mib).
Displays the actual number of IP addresses identified as Top Talkers in the
generated report. The maximum report size is 20.
Displays the time at which the Top Talkers report was initiated (based on
System Up Time).
Displays the amount of time that the unit has been operational since it was
turned on or last reset.
The Top Talkers table reports in descending order the IP addresses that have
generated the most traffic during the requested report’s duration. For each IP
address listed, the report displays the number of Rx frames, Rx octets, Tx
frames, and Tx octets that have been passed across it. In addition, the
Timestamp field indicates the time at which a packet was examined for the
specified IP address.
IP Gateway Screen
The IP Gateway is a feature of the WANsuite 5160/5130 that allows routing
of IP packets from one network to another using static routes configuration
and/or dynamic routing. The IP Gateway uses Routing Information Protocol
(RIP) 1 or RIP 2 or Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing.
RIP 1 and RIP 2 are protocols that allow exchange of routing information
between two routers. With that information exchange, a router can build its
own routing tables that later can be used for “routing” IP packets.
OSPF is a shortest path first (SPF) or link-state protocol. OSPF is an internal
gateway protocol (IGP) that distributes routing information between routers in
4-58
WANsuite 5160/5130
a single autonomous system (AS). OSPF chooses the least cost path as the
best path.
While RIP is ideal for small- to medium-sized networks, OSPF is more
suitable for complex networks with a large number of routers. OSPF provides
equal cost multipath routing where packets to a single destination can be sent
via more than one interface simultaneously.
The IP Gateway also supports unnumbered networks. An unnumbered
network is a point-to-point connection without an assigned IP address This
feature reduces the number of IP addresses required.
Figure 4.51 IP Gateway Screen
RIP Parameters
RIP Enable
Globally enables RIP 1, RIP 2, or No RIP. Default is RIP 2.
Values: Disable, Enable RIP1, Enable RIP2
Default: Enable RIP2
RIP Trust Neighbors
Globally enables the trusted neighbors feature. If there is a list of trusted
neighbors in an IP Gateway, only RIP packets coming from those trusted
neighbors will be used to build the internal routing table.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Enable
RIP Interval
Interval for RIP packet to be sent. Default is 30 seconds.
RIP Domain
Value representing the RIP domain. Default is 0.
OSPF Parameters
OSPF Enable
OSPF stands for Open Shortest Path First Routing, which is a shortest-pathfirst (SPF) or link-state protocol. OSPF is an interior gateway protocol that
VT100 Interface
4-59
distributes routing information between routers in a single autonomous
system. This Protocol is suitable for complex networks with a large number of
routers. If a large network is involved, OSPF may be the solution for the user.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
OSPF Router ID
This 32-bit number assigned to each router running the OSPF protocol
uniquely identifies the router within an Autonomous System. Each router
requires a unique router ID. Default is the LAN IP address of the unit.
The IP Gateway screen provides the following prompts that may be selected
by pressing the “Enter” key:
Prompt
Function
RIP Parameters
Static Route Table
Displays static and dynamic route information.
Static ARP Table
Displays static ARP information.
Trusted Neighbors
Displays trusted neighbors information.
OSPF Parameters
Area Table
Displays area information.
Virtual Link Table
Displays virtual link information.
Circuit Table
Provides user access to circuit-related information/
operation.
Circuit Table Screen
This menu shows the configured circuit. To configure a new circuit, select
"Add New."
Figure 4.52 Circuit Table Screen
4-60
WANsuite 5160/5130
Circuit Details Screen
Access this menu by selecting the appropriate <Index> number from the
Circuit Table menu.The screen’s parameters are described in the paragraphs
that follow.
Figure 4.53 Circuit Details Screen
Endpoint
IP Address
IP Mask
Max Transmit Unit
Cost
RIP Status
Endpoint name. By default, the first circuit is always the LAN circuit. All
other circuits are associated with Endpoint names as defined in the Endpoint
Table. (See Endpoint Table Screen shown on page 4-41).
IP Address of the circuit.
IP mask of the circuit.
Maximum transmit unit this circuit will send at any one time.
Represents the relative time of treatment of an IP packet. This value is used
when there are multiple routes to the same destination. When two or more
routes are available, the one with the lowest circuit cost is selected. A frame
relay circuit should have a higher value than a LAN circuit.
Indicates whether or not RIP is enabled on this circuit.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Enable
Multicast Status
Indicates whether or not Multicast is enabled on this circuit.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Enable
OSPF Status
Indicates whether or not OSPF is enabled on this circuit.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Enable
VT100 Interface
4-61
OSPF Area
OSPF LSA Timer
Represents that area that this circuit is part of.
Determines how often The Link State Acknowledgment (LSA) packet is sent.
Values: 1−3600
Default: 5
OSPF LSU Delay
The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a Link State Update
(LSU) packet over this circuit interface.
Values: 1−3600
Default: 1
OSPF Router Priority
This 8-bit unsigned integer ranges from 1 to 255 and assigns priority to one of
two routers attached to the same network; without an assigned priority, both
routers attempt to become the designated router.
Values: 1−255
Default: 1
OSPF Hello Interval
The time in seconds between the Hello packets that a router sends on a
circuit. This value is also advertised in the router’s Hello packets and must be
identical for all routers on the same network. The smaller the Hello Interval,
the sooner topological changes are detected (but then more traffic is created).
Values: 1−65535
Default: 1
OSPF Dead Interval
The number of seconds that a router’s “Hellos” have not been received before
its neighbors declare the router down. The value must be the same as the
value on the network.
Values: 1−65535
Default: 40
OSPF Auth Key
When configured, this parameter allows an authentication procedure to be
executed on the OSPF header. If the 64-bit (8 character) password does not
correspond, the packet is thrown away.
Values: 64 bits (8 characters)
Default: 8 spaces (no authentication)
Static Route Table Screen
Under some circumstances, it may not be necessary for a router to learn a
route using ordinary means such as RIP or OSPF. It is possible under these
circumstances for you to add a route to the route table of a router. The Static
Route menus are always associated with a circuit.
4-62
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 4.54 Static Route Table Screen
The fields on this screen are described in the table below.
Field
Description
Endpoint
Endpoint name (or interface) through which to send the IP packet
to reach the Target IP Address.
Target IP Address
Represents the target network that you want this router to reach.
Target IP Mask
Mask of the target network.
Next Hop
IP address of the next device in the route.
Cost
Cost of using that route.
Rte Stat
Indicates whether or not a route is enabled or disabled.
Routes Details Screen
This screen displays the details associated with a specific route.
Figure 4.55 Routes Details Screen
VT100 Interface
4-63
Endpoint
Target IP Address
Target IP Mask
Endpoint name (or interface) through which to send the IP packet to reach the
Target IP Address.
Represents the target network that you want this router to reach.
Mask of the target network.
NOTICE: Setting the target IP address and Target IP Mask to 0.0.0.0 defines THE
default route for this unit.
Next Hop IP Address:
Cost
Route Status
IP address of the next device in the route.
Cost of using that route.
Indicates whether this route is enabled or disabled.
Dynamic Route Table Screen
Access this menu by selecting the “Static Route Table” on the IP Gateway
menu and then selecting the Dynamic Route Table prompt. This table shows
all known routes. Please note that not all parameters are necessarily defined,
depending on whether or not the routes were learned dynamically. Primarily,
the most useful information is included in "Destination," "If Ndx," and
"Mask" columns.
Figure 4.56 Dynamic Route Table Screen
The Dynamic Route Table displays the fields listed below.
4-64
Field
Description
Destination
Network to be reached.
If Ndx
Internal TCP/IP stack interface number.
Next Hop
IP address used to reach the destination network.
Mask
Mask of the destination network.
WANsuite 5160/5130
Static ARP Table Screen
ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) is used by the router to dynamically
associate a high-level IP address to a low-level physical hardware address.
ARP packets are only sent across a single physical network.
There are some cases when an IP-compatible device does not support ARP or
ARP is deliberately disabled (for security). Then this is when this menu is
useful. Instead of using ARP to dynamically update the router internal MAC
<-> IP Address Table, this menu can force an entry into that table. This entry
never times out.
At least one circuit must be defined to create a Static ARP Table entry
because an ARP entry is always associated with a circuit. The static ARP
table is useful when a Host does not respond to an ARP request. Access this
menu by selecting “Static ARP Table” from the IP Gateway menu.
Figure 4.57 Static ARP Table Screen
The fields listed below are displayed on the Static ARP Table screen.
Field
Description
Endpoint
Endpoint name (or Interface) through which to send the IP packet
to reach the defined IP address. Currently, this is always the LAN.
IP Address
The IP address of the unit for which you want to define the MAC
address.
MAC Address
The MAC address of the host to be reached.
ARP Status
Displays whether this static ARP is enabled or disabled.
ARP Details Screen
Access this screen by selecting the applicable <Index> number on the ARP
Table screen.
VT100 Interface
4-65
Figure 4.58 ARP Details Screen
Endpoint
IP Address
Endpoint name (or Interface) through which to send the IP packet to reach the
defined IP Address. The default is the LAN.
IP address of the circuit.
Values: 0.0.0.0−255.255.255.255
Default: 0.0.0.0
MAC Address
The MAC address of the Host to be reached.
Values: A 6-byte value
Default: 00-00-00-00-00-00
ARP Status
Displays whether this static ARP is enabled or disabled.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Enable
Trusted Neighbors Screen
The Trusted Neighbors feature can be used to store RIP information only
from a specific router. This allows the router to reject any RIP information
coming from non-Trusted Neighbors. Only information coming from Trusted
Neighbors is kept by the router. Access this menu by choosing Trusted
Neighbors from the IP Gateway menu. This table is useful when the Network
Administrator wants to listen to RIP of specific router(s).
4-66
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 4.59 Trusted Neighbors Screen
Add New
Adds a Trusted Neighbors IP address.
Neighbor Details Screen
Access this screen (Figure 4.60) by selecting a number under the <Index>
column. This screen lists all IP addresses of Trusted Neighbors.
Figure 4.60 Neighbor Details Screen
The Neighbor Details screen provides a “Delete Neighbor” prompt that lets
you delete this Trusted Neighbor.
Area Table Screen
An Area allows growth and makes the networks at a site easier to manage. An
area is self-contained; knowledge of an area’s topology remains hidden from
other areas. Thus, multiple groups within a given site retain the ability to
change their internal network topology independently.
VT100 Interface
4-67
Figure 4.61 Area Table Screen
The fields displayed on the Area Table screen are described below.
Field
Description
Area ID
Displays the ID of the Area (represented by an IP address).
Ena
Displays whether the defined area is enabled or disabled.
Auth Type
Indicates Area validation.
Stub
Displays whether or not the defined area is a Stub Area.
Addr Summary
Displays the Address Summary of the defined Area.
Mask Summary
Displays the Mask Summary of the defined Area.
Ad
Displays whether advertising is enabled or disabled for this Area.
Area Details Screen
This screen displays the details associated with a defined Area.
Figure 4.62 Area Details Screen
4-68
WANsuite 5160/5130
Area ID
This parameter has the same format as the IP Address of the Mask Address.
Values: 0.0.0.0−255.255.255.255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Enable
Displays whether or not this Area is enabled.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Enable
Auth Type
Indicates type of Authentication.
Values: Simple, None
Default: None
Stub
An area can be configured as stub when there is a single exit point from the
area, or when the choice of exit point need not be made on a per-externaldestination basis.
Values: Yes, No
Default: No
Address Summary
A configured address range specifies what addresses are contained within an
area. When summarizing the routes in an area to inform other areas, all routes
falling within the configured range are described by a single LSA, thus
decreasing the size of the LSA database.
Values: 0.0.0.0−255.255.255.255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Mask Summary
IP Mask of the summary to be added.
Values: 0.0.0.0−255.255.255.255
Default: 0.0.0.0
Advertise
Describes the local state of a router or network. This includes the state of the
route’s interfaces and adjacencies. Each link state advertisement is flooded
throughout the routing domain. The collected link state advertisements of all
routers and networks form the protocol's topological database.
Values: Yes, No
Default: No
Virtual Link Table Screen
To permit maximum flexibility, OSPF allows the configuration of virtual links
to enable the backbone area to appear contiguous despite the physical reality.
In OSPF, the backbone is defined as an Area ID of 0.0.0.0. This backbone
cannot be disconnected in any way or some areas of the Autonomous System
become unreachable. This is because all inter-area traffic must go through the
backbone. In fact, the backbone is responsible of all inter-area routing
information distribution.
VT100 Interface
4-69
It is possible that an area cannot be connected directly to the backbone. In this
case a virtual link is used. To establish or maintain the connectivity of the
backbone, virtual links can be configured through non-backbone areas.
Basically, virtual links are used to connect components that are otherwise not
connected to the backbone.
A virtual link is treated by OSPF as a point-to-point unnumbered network
joining two area border routers. The virtual link must be configured in both of
the area border routers.
A virtual link is defined by the following two parameters:
•
•
The Router ID of the virtual link’s other endpoint
The non-backbone area the virtual link goes through.
Figure 4.63 Virtual Link Table Screen
The fields displayed on the Virtual Link Table screen are described below.
Field
Description
Enable
Enables the definition of a virtual link.
Transit Area ID
The non-backbone area the virtual link goes through.
Area Border
Router ID
The Router ID of the virtual link’s other endpoint.
Virtual Link Details Screen
This screen displays the details associated with the specific Virtual Link.
4-70
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 4.64 Virtual Link Details Screen
TCP Server
NOTICE: TCP Server traffic has a higher priority than other types of traffic
flowing through the unit. Refer to Normal Tx Queue Size on page 4-30
for more details.
The TCP Server is a general-purpose application that maps arbitrary TCP port
numbers to non-TCP/IP devices that have been assigned an endpoint. (See the
Endpoint Table Screen on page 4-40.)
TCP Server Screen
The TCP Server Screen (Figure 4.65) lets you establish TCP connections and
map them to physical devices that communicate via a supported interface.
Figure 4.65 TCP Server Screen
Access the TCP Connection Details screen (Figure 4.66) by selecting the
appropriate number under the <Ndx> column. The TCP Connection Details
VT100 Interface
4-71
screen lists the Index number, the Endpoint name, the TCP Local Port
number, and whether or not this entry is enabled.
Figure 4.66 TCP Connection Details Screen
Select the TCP Connection Table prompt on the TCP Server screen to access
the screen shown in Figure 4.67. This screen lets you see which addresses and
ports are in a “listening” state and which are already established.
Figure 4.67 TCP Connection Table Screen
Select the “TCP Host Access Table” prompt on the TCP Server screen to
access a screen (Figure 4.68) where you can specify up to 10 IP addresses that
may access the services provided by TCP Server. If no addresses are
provided, any host can access the services provided by TCP Server.
4-72
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 4.68 TCP Host Access Screen
You can access the Host Access Details (Figure 4.69) for a specific <Ndx>
number by selecting the appropriate number under the <Ndx> column.
Figure 4.69 TCP Host Access Details Screen
Network Address Translation (NAT)
NAT is a method of connecting multiple computers to the Internet (or any
other IP network) using one IP address. This lets users cost-effectively and
efficiently connect their networks to the Internet.
Whether on a global or local port, NAT provides translation only upon receipt
of a packet, which NAT will translate, not translate, or filter, depending on the
user-specified parameters (further described below). If the decision is made to
“translate,” the packet will be modified internally, and eventually sent on to
the IP Gateway to be processed. If the decision is made not to “translate,” the
packet will not be modified in any way. If the decision is made to “filter,” the
packet will be discarded without any further action required.
VT100 Interface
4-73
NOTICE: You must Save and Restart for any changes in NAT configuration
parameters to take effect.
NAT Details Screen
The NAT Details screen (Figure 4.70) lets the user configure the NAT global
parameters described below.
Figure 4.70 NAT Details Screen
Enable
Mode
Global IP Addr
Enables or disables NAT. Default is “Disable.”
Selects the Network Address Port Translation (NAPT) mode or the Basic NAT
mode. In NAPT mode, all hosts on the Global (public) side view all hosts on
the Local (private) side as a single internet host (one IP address). In Basic
NAT mode, the Global IP address is assigned as a Class C host address (Mask
of 255.255.255.0). Each private IP address on the Local side is mapped to a
Class C public address on the Global side. In other words, if there are 30
hosts on the private (Local) side, 30 public (Global) addresses are required.
The default is NAPT.
Global IP Address used in NAPT mode. Must be a valid Class C address.
Default is LAN IP Address.
Global Mask
IP Mask associated with defined Global IP Address. Default is LAN IP Mask.
ICMP Default Addr
Default source address used to answer any ICMP request. Default is LAN IP
Address. ICMP requests are not transferred from the Global to the Local side.
Rather they are answered by the unit itself since Local addresses are private
and do not receive unsolicited requests.
Filter Non Local
Address
Discards any packet with “non corporate” source address. Default is “Enable.”
The screen parameters listed below are related to the NAT Control Block
Timer. Note that default values should be in accordance with most NAT
4-74
WANsuite 5160/5130
applications. The timers’ values minimize NAT resources. Generally, when a
timer has expired, the resources used are no longer needed. Those resources
will then be available for other connection resources.
IP Entry Timer
The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources when not using TCP,
UDP, or ICMP.
Values: 0−65535
Default: 120
TCP Connection Timer
The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources when attempting to
establish a TCP connection.
Values: 0−65535
Default: 300
TCP Closing Timer
The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources when attempting to
close a TCP connection.
Values: 0−65535
Default: 0
TCP Disconnected
Timer
The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources when attempting to
disconnect from TCP.
Values: 0−65535
Default: 120
TCP Sequence Delta
Timer
The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources when managing TCP
Packet Sequencing.
Values: 0−65535
Default: 180
UDP Timer
The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources for a UDP port in
use.
Values: 0−65535
Default: 120
ICMP Timer
The maximum time (in seconds) NAT will use resources for any ICMP
request.
Values: 0−65535
Default: 120
The NAT Details screen provides the following user-activated prompts:
Prompt
Function
Static TCP Translation Table
Allows static mapping of global TCP Server ports to
a local host IP address/port combination.
VT100 Interface
4-75
Prompt
Function
NAT Ports
Defines NAT global/Internet and local/corporate
ports.
Static UDP Translation Table
Allows static mapping of global UDP Server ports to
a local host IP address/port combination.
Static TCP Trans Table Screen
The Static TCP Trans Table screen (Figure 4.71) allows static mapping of
global TCP Server ports to a local host IP address/port combination. The
parameters described below enable access to TCP servers on the private/
corporate network “behind the NAT.” The parameters may be used only when
in NAPT mode.
Figure 4.71 Static TCP Translation Table Screen
Global Port
Decimal IP Port exposed to the global Internet. Default is 0.
Server Port
Decimal IP Port of the local TCP Server. This port is usually the same as the
Global Port. Default is 0.
Server Address
IP Address of the local TCP Server. Default is 0.0.0.0.
The “Add New” prompt lets the user add additional addresses.
You can configure or change the above-listed parameters on the Static TCP
Trans Details screen (Figure 4.72), which is accessed by selecting the
appropriate <Ndx> number on the Static TCP Trans Table screen.
4-76
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 4.72 Static TCP Translation Details Screen
NAT Ports Screen
The parameters on the NAT Ports screen (Figure 4.73) define the NAT global/
Internet and local/Corporate ports. These parameters are configured in the
NAT Ports Details screen shown in Figure 4.74. Access the NAT Ports Details
screen by selecting the <Ndx> number of the desired port on the NAT Ports
screen.
Figure 4.73 NAT Ports Screen
Enable
Default Translation
Enables or disables the NAT port. Default is “Enable.”
Forces translation on a specific IP port regardless of the source IP Address. If
Default Translation is set to “Enable,” the packet will never be discarded, but
will always pass through the translation path. Therefore, any packets with a
destination address different from the global/Internet network address will be
processed by the IP Gateway, and may be routed to another port. If this
parameter is set to “Disable,” no packet with a destination address different
from the global/Internet address will be processed. Setting this parameter to
VT100 Interface
4-77
“Disable” will override an “Enable” parameter set under “Filter Non Local
Address” on the NAT Details menu.
Type
Defines whether this port is local or global. Default is LAN global. All others
are local.
IP Address
IP Address of this port. Default is the value defined in the IP Gateway Circuit
Table.
Mask
Mask related to the defined IP Address. Default is the value defined in the IP
Gateway Circuit Table.
Endpoint
The Endpoint name of the circuit associated with the LAN or WAN port.
Default is LAN for the first port.
The “Add New” prompt lets the user add additional ports.
Figure 4.74 NAT Port Details Screen
The NAT Port Details screen provides the following user-activated prompts:
Prompt
Function
Delete
Deletes the specified NAT Port.
Status
Displays the NAT Port Status screen (Figure 4.75).
The NAT Port Status screen shown below displays for each port the processed
packets from specific IP addresses.
4-78
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 4.75 NAT Port Status Screen
IP Address
NAT IP Address
Processed Packets
Original IP Address of the host.
Translated IP Address of the host.
Number of packets processed by NAT for this address.
Static UDP Trans Table Screen
The Static UDP Trans Table screen (Figure 4.76) allows static mapping of
global UDP Server ports to a local host IP address/port combination. The
parameters described below enable access to UDP Servers on the private/
corporate network “behind the NAT.” The parameters may be used only when
in NAPT mode.
Figure 4.76 Static UDP Translation Table Screen
Global Port
Decimal IP Port exposed to the global Internet. Default is 0.
Server Port
Decimal IP Port of the local UDP Server. This port is usually the same as the
Global Port. Default is 0.
VT100 Interface
4-79
Server Address
IP Address of the local UDP Server. Default is 0.0.0.0.
The “Add New” prompt lets the user add additional addresses.
You can configure or change the above-listed parameters on the Static UDP
Trans Details screen (Figure 4.77), which is accessed by selecting the
appropriate <Ndx> number on the Static UDP Trans Table screen.
Figure 4.77 Static UDP Translation Details Screen
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
DHCP provides a mechanism through which computers using TCP/IP can
obtain protocol configuration parameters automatically through the network.
The most important configuration parameter associated with DHCP is the IP
address. A computer must initially be assigned a specific IP address that is
appropriate to the network to which the computer is attached, and that is not
assigned to any other computer on that network. If a computer moves to a
new network, it must be assigned a new IP address for that new network.
DHCP can be used to manage these assignments automatically.
DHCP has other important configuration parameters also, such as the subnet
mask, default router, and Domain Name System (DNS) server. Using DHCP, a
network administrator can avoid “hands-on” configuration of individual
computers through complex and confusing setup applications. Instead, those
computers can obtain all required configuration parameters automatically,
without manual intervention, from a centrally managed DHCP server. DHCP
is available on the 10/100 Ethernet port only.
NOTICE: You must Save and Restart for any changes in DHCP configuration
parameters to take effect.
NOTICE: Always verify that a DHCP server is available on the network before
enabling DHCP Client. If, on power-up, a DHCP server is not found, a
60-second timeout will occur.
4-80
WANsuite 5160/5130
DHCP Server Details Screen
The DHCP Server Details screen (Figure 4.78) lets you configure the
parameters described below.
Figure 4.78 DHCP Server Details Screen
Enable
Number of Ports
TTL
Service Type
Lease Time
Primary DNS IP Addr
Secondary DNS IP
Addr
Enables or disables the DHCP Server. Default is “Disable.”
Defines the number of DHCP ports to be used. In this version, only “1” is a
valid value.
Time to Live for any DHCP packet. Default is 64.
Type of Service used by the DHCP Server packet. Default is 1.
Tells the DHCP client the number of seconds it can retain this IP address. The
client should make a new DHCP request within the specified amount of time
to ensure the IP address is not given to another PC. Default is 600 seconds.
If requested by DHCP client, the client then uses this address to resolve
names of IP addresses. Default is 0.0.0.0.
If requested by DHCP client, the client then uses this secondary address to
resolve names of IP addresses. Default is 0.0.0.0.
Domain Name
Domain name to be used by all DHCP clients. Default is user’s server.
Router IP Addr
IP address that all clients use for Gateway or Router. Default is 0.0.0.0.
Primary WINS IP
Addr
If requested by DHCP client, the client then uses this address to resolve
names of IP addresses. Default is 0.0.0.0.
Secondary WINS IP
Addr
If requested by DHCP client, the client then uses this secondary address to
resolve names of IP addresses. Default is 0.0.0.0.
VT100 Interface
4-81
The DHCP Server Details screen provides the following user-activated
prompts:
Prompt
Function
Host Table
Lists Host names (DHCP server identification).
Static Entry Table
Creates a list of static IP addresses associated with MAC
addresses.
Address List Table
Defines the addresses available for DHCP clients.
Address Status Table
Displays DHCP Server statistics.
DHCP Hosts Screen
In some cases, it may be necessary to provide an IP station with a specific
DHCP server name, which may be used by the IP station when making a
DHCP request. That name is included on the DHCP Hosts screen (Figure
4.79), which identifies the DHCP server sending DHCP packets.
Figure 4.79 DHCP Hosts Screen
Host Name
The name of the DHCP Server. Default is none.
Select “Add New” to add a new host name.
NOTICE: You must Save and Restart for the new Server name to become active.
Static Entries Screen
The Static Entries screen (Figure 4.80) lists static IP addresses associated with
MAC addresses. This ensures that the same IP address will always be used for
a given PC provided its MAC address is known. These parameters are
configured on the Static Entries Details screen accessed by selecting a number
from the <Ndx> column.
4-82
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 4.80 Static Entries Screen
MAC Address
IP Address
Mask
Host Name
MAC Address you want to associate with an IP address.
IP Address given to the DHCP client if that client has the MAC Address
defined on this screen.
Mask associated with the IP Address shown on the screen.
Name given to the DHCP client.
Select “Add New” to add a static entry.
IP Address List Screen
The IP Address List screen (Figure 4.8) displays the “pool” of addresses
available for DHCP clients. These parameters are configured on the IP
Address List Details screen accessed by clicking on an <Ndx> number.
Figure 4.81 IP Address List
VT100 Interface
4-83
IP Start
Starting IP Address of the DHCP client pool.
IP End
Ending IP Address of the DHCP client pool.
IP Exclude Start
IP Exclude End
Beginning of “excluded” range.
End of “excluded” range.
Select “Add New” to add an IP address.
IP Address Status Screen
The IP Address Status screen (Figure 4.82) displays a list of all current DHCP
clients.
Figure 4.82 IP Address Status Screen
MAC Address
IP Address
Status
MAC Address of this DHCP client.
IP Address given to this DHCP client if that client has the MAC Address
defined on this screen.
Provides IP Address Status.
Bridge
A Bridge operates at the physical network layer, connecting two or more
networks and forwarding packets between those networks. For example, a
Bridge will connect two or more physical Ethernet cable segments and
forward Ethernet packets from one segment to the other.
Bridges differ from routers in that bridges forward packets based on physical
addresses rather than on the IP Addresses that routers use to forward packets.
Bridges will not “blindly” forward packets from one network to others,
however. Rather, it learns all local physical addresses and forwards packets
based on those learned “tables.” This greatly reduces the number of
broadcasted packets, thus saving valuable bandwidth.
4-84
WANsuite 5160/5130
The Bridge Details screen shown in Figure 4.83 lets you access and configure
the parameters described below.
Figure 4.83 Bridge Details Screen
From this screen, you may view the parameters described below.
Enable
Group Multicast MAC
Address
Bridge ID
Hello Timer
Enables or disables Bridging capability.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Disable
MAC Address recognized by the Bridge as the group address for the Bridge
Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) transfer between bridges.
Values: Any valid Group Multicast MAC Address
Default: 0180C2000000
Consists of a bridge priority and its own MAC Address.
Values: 1−65535
Default: 2
Specifies the BPDU broadcasting interval.
Values: 1−65535 s
Default: 10 s
Max Age Timer
Specifies the length of time a bridge will consider the network topology held
in memory as valid.
Values: 1−65535 s
Default: 60 s
Forward Delay
Specifies the length of time to delay creation of a temporary loop in the
network.
Values: 1−65535 s
Default: 5 s
VT100 Interface
4-85
Filter Ageing Timer
Specifies the length of time an entry in the lookup table will be held if no
traffic is received from the specified MAC Address.
Values: 1−65535 s
Default: 300 s
The Bridge Details screen provides the following user-activated prompts:
Prompt
Function
Bridge Port Table
Displays the Bridge Port Table screen (Figure 4.84) that lets
the user access and configure the Bridge Port Details screen
(Figure 4.85).
Bridge Lookup Table
Displays the Bridge Lookup Table screen (Figure 4.86) that
contains all MAC Addresses learned by the Bridge.
Figure 4.84 Bridge Port Table
The Bridge Port Table screen lets you view the parameters described below
the Bridge Port Details screen. Clicking on a number in the <Ndx> column of
the Bridge Port Table will bring up the Bridge Port Details screen, which
displays, and, in some cases, lets you change, the parameters described below.
4-86
WANsuite 5160/5130
Figure 4.85 Bridge Port Details
Enable
Endpoint
BPDU Option
Enables or disables Bridging on this port.
Endpoint name.
Shows if BPDU packet will be sent and received on this port.
Filter By Multicast
Addr Dest
Filters multicast messages received on this port, which reduces the load on the
WAN connection.
Filter By Broadcast
Addr Dest
Filters broadcast messages received on this port, which reduces the load on
the WAN connection.
Forward IP Frames
Only
Setting this option to “Yes” specifies that only IP frames will be forwarded
and all other frames will be filtered.
Priority
Path Cost
State
Value of priority associated with this port. The lower the value, the higher the
priority.
Value of efficiency of the path to the port. A higher path cost indicates a
slower link.
If Enabled, reflects the state of the port. “Blocking” means there is no data
transfer between LANs. “Listening” means the frames received from this port
are filtered, but do not modify the Lookup Table. “Learning” means that
while the port continues to look at frames without participating in data
transfer, the frames received from the port will be used to update the Lookup
Table. “Forwarding” means the port participates fully in data transfer and the
frames received are used to update the Lookup Table.
Designated Root
MAC Address of the designated root of the spanning-tree topology.
Designated Cost
Associated Path Cost to the route for this port.
VT100 Interface
4-87
Designated Bridge
Forward
Transmissions
Input Frame
Designated Bridge MAC Address.
Number of times this port has changed from any other state to a “Forwarding”
state.
Number of frames received.
Output Frame
Number of frames transmitted.
Input Discards
Number of frames discarded.
Figure 4.86 Bridge Lookup Table
Address
Port
Status
MAC Address learned and included in the forwarding table.
Port where the MAC Address was learned.
How the address was included in the forwarding table. The two possibilities
include “Self” (the unit’s own MAC address), and “Learned” (the unit-learned
MAC address is directly accessible by this port).
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
Use the SMTP Screen (Figure 4.87) to configure the SMTP function of the
WANsuite 5160/5130. SMTP is used to forward notification of events to a
user-definable list of up to five recipients. The even notification is sent as an
e-mail in the following format:
From: WANsuite@verilink.com
To: Event Receiver
Subject: Even Notification
IP Address: 192.168.60.157
System Up Time: 0 days, 01:20:02
System Name:
System Location:
System Contact:
4-88
WANsuite 5160/5130
Reporting the following event:
OOFS Threshold Exceeded, ifIndex 3, Count 5
The parameters associated with the SMTP Details screen are described below.
Figure 4.87 SMTP Screen
Mail Server IP Address
Domain Name
IP address of the mail server to which notifications will be sent.
Name of domain where the device resides (i.e., Verilink.com)
Mail From
E-mail address of the device (WANsuite). While the device will not be able to
retrieve e-mail from a service, the mail needs to have the “From” address
filled in.
Recipient 1...5
E-mail addresses of recipients of event notifications (i.e., sales@verilink.com
or support@verilink.com).
Encryption
If a DLCI encapsulation is set for FRF.17 instead of RFC1490, all data will
be encrypted using FRF.17 Mode One formats and protocols. However, the
encryption method is Blowfish, rather than the DES specified in FRF.17.
NOTICE: This software-based encryption should not affect performance of the
unit in a SCADA environment because the message size is quite small.
However, a main site unit encrypting up to 128 DLCIs and operating a
number of remote units using encryption will see a degradation in
performance as traffic increases.
VT100 Interface
4-89
Figure 4.88 Encryption Details Screen
4-90
WANsuite 5160/5130
CHAPTER
5
FRONT PANEL LCD INTERFACE
CHAPTER 5
Introduction
This chapter describes the menus and options associated with the WANsuite
5160/5130’s front panel LCD interface.
Description of Front Panel
The front panels of the WANsuite 5160 (Figure 5.1) and 5130 are the same
except that the 5130 has an LED labeled “Alarm” where, on the 5160, that
LED is labeled “#2 Serial.” Both units have four LED status indicators, three
user-activated input control buttons, and a 2-line, 16-character LCD screen
that provides access to unit configuration, diagnostics, and utilities.
Figure 5.1
WANsuite 5160 Front Panel
Figure 5.2
WANsuite 5130 Front Panel
Front Panel LCD Interface
5-1
The table below describes the WANsuite 5160/5130’s LED indicators.
5-2
Indicator
Description
NET
This indicator is off (not illuminated) when the port has not been
configured.
The indicator lights green when the T1 link is operational and
the configured protocol established.
The indicator lights red if the T1 link is down and the configured
protocol is not established.
The indicator lights amber if the T1 link is up and at least one
configured protocol is established.
#1 SERIAL
INTERFACE or
#2 SERIAL
INTERFACE
(5160) or
SERIAL
INTERFACE
(5130)
DTR Alarm Enabled:
This indicator is off (not illuminated) when the port has not been
configured.
The indicator lights green when DTR is active and the
configured protocol is established.
The indicator lights red when DTR is not active and the
configured protocol is not established.
The indicator lights amber when DTR is not active or the
configured protocol is not established.
DTR Alarm Disabled:
This indicator is off (not illuminated) when the port has not been
configured.
The indicator lights green when the configured protocol is
established.
The indicator lights red when the configured protocol is not
established.
ALARM
(5130)
This indicator lights red if an alarm condition exists
The indicator lights amber if a “yellow” alarm condition exists.
POWER
This indicator lights green when power is applied to the unit.
The indicator lights amber in test modes (Port looped or BERT
active).
WANsuite 5160/5130
The use of the input control buttons found on all three units is defined in the
following table:
Button
Description
EXIT
The EXIT button lets you exit a menu option, which then places the
unit in the next higher level in the menu hierarchy. If you are in the
process of editing an option and pressing the EXIT button, you will
exit that screen without any changes having been saved. If you are in
the main menu and press EXIT, you will be logged off the unit.
SCROLL
The SCROLL button lets you review the available options for a given
level in the menu hierarchy or scroll through possible settings for a
parameter. The SCROLL button is also used to set alphanumerical
values, where applicable, by scrolling incrementally through digits 0–
9 or letters A–Z and a–z.
SELECT
The SELECT button lets you select the currently displayed option or
value for a given field, and is also used to enter an “edit” mode for
parameters that require user-specified input. The SELECT button is
also used to confirm certain actions or settings.
LCD Front Panel Operation
After power is applied and the unit performs a self test, the unit displays the
“Idle” screen shown in Figure 5.3. The top line of the display shows the unit
ID and the second line shows the revision number of the software the unit is
using. Press any one of the front panel buttons to leave the “Idle” screen and
access the interface.
Figure 5.3
WANsuite 5160/5130 Idle Screens
WANsuite 5160
Rev. xx.x/xx.x
WANsuite 5130
Rev. xx.x/xx.x
Password
The unit is factory shipped without a programmed password. When you
access this interface for the first time, the password prompt will not appear
and the interface proceeds directly to the Main Menu screen as shown in
Figure 5.4.
Figure 5.4
Main Menu Screen
MAIN MENU
ALARMS
The password screen (Figure 5.5) will appear only after you have established
a password. Enter a correct password to advance to the Main Menu.
Figure 5.5
Password Screen
ENTER PASSWORD
PW:
********
Front Panel LCD Interface
5-3
To enter an established password, press the SCROLL button until the desired
character appears (the characters scroll 0–9, A–Z, and a–z for a total of 62
distinct characters), then press the SELECT button to enter that character.
Continue selecting the appropriate characters until the last character is
entered. Finally, press the EXIT button. A correctly entered password advances
the unit to the Main Menu screen. An incorrectly entered password returns an
“Idle” screen. If unsuccessful, reenter the password.
NOTICE: Remember that passwords are case-sensitive. When logging on,
password must be entered exactly as it was programmed.
Interface Conventions
Figure 5.6 shows a front panel display consisting of a menu title, the menu
element, and the information element.
Figure 5.6
LCD Menu Example Showing Screen Elements
Menu Title
Menu Element
NET CONFIG
FRAMING:
ESF
Information Element
Menu Title
The menu title shows the general classification for a group of accessible
functions.
Menu Element
There are three types of menu elements, distinguished by the box type shown
in the menu diagrams.
•
A large, solid box indicates user-selectable menus with lower level menu
items.
•
A dashed box indicates user-selectable parameters. Press SELECT to execute
the displayed configuration.
•
A small, solid box indicates either a non- selectable status or a field in which
a particular value can be entered.
For example, refer to WANsuite 5160 Alarms Menu Tree on page 5-6. The
upper level menus are shown within a large, solid box, which indicates userselectable menus. The lower level menus are shown within dashed boxes to
indicate user-selectable parameters. The smaller, solid boxes under “Net 15
Min Perf” indicate that values can be entered in these fields.
The menu element is a menu or submenu accessible by pressing the SELECT
button. When a menu element is selected, it becomes the menu title and the
next lower level in the hierarchy becomes the menu element. For example, if
the MAIN MENU menu element is NET CONFIG, pressing the SELECT
button moves NET CONFIG up to the menu title level and FRAMING moves
up to the menu element level with ESF being displayed as the option.
5-4
WANsuite 5160/5130
Information Element
The information element is a user-selectable field allowing changes to the
setting. Initially, it is a display-only field. To access the information element,
press the SELECT button at the desired menu element. Scroll through the
available information element options by pressing the SCROLL button; an
arrow (<) will appear to the right of the available options as you scroll
through them. Press the SELECT button when the desired option is displayed.
Pressing the SELECT button changes the user-selectable information element
to the visible parameter (the arrow will disappear after the selection has been
made) and immediately returns the unit to the menu element.
When the EXIT button is pressed while accessing a selectable element, any
changes to the parameters in the information element are disregarded and the
panel display returns to the element menu. Every time the EXIT button is
pressed, the cursor returns to the next higher level in the menu hierarchy.
Cursor
When the menu’s information element is a user-selectable function, a cursor
(represented by a blinking LCD character box) will appear on the right-most
side of the element’s value. This lets you scroll through the options available
for that portion of the element. Pressing the SELECT button a second time sets
that parameter. The cursor does not appear when status-only elements are
displayed.
NOTICE: To return to the previous screen without changing a parameter, press
EXIT; do not press SELECT. Pressing EXIT again returns you to the
previous screen.
Main Menu
The front panel interface is designed on a hierarchical menu system as shown
in Figure 5.7. The WANsuite 5160/5130 lets you choose from the submenu
options beginning at the MAIN MENU.
Figure 5.7
Main Menu Tree Structure
MAIN MENU
Alarms
(page 5-5)
Performance
(page 5-8)
Maintenance
(page 5-9)
Configuration
(page 5-12)
Utilities
(page 5-22)
Alarms Menu
The ALARMS menu lets you view the current (within the last 15 minutes)
and threshold alarm status for the network lines.
Front Panel LCD Interface
5-5
Figure 5.8
WANsuite 5160 Alarms Menu Tree
Alarms
Net 1
Alarm Stats
Net 2
Alarm Stats
Net 1
15 Min Perf
Net 2
15 Min Perf
ES
SES
LOSS
OOFS
BPVS
CSS
RAS
AISS
UAS
ES
SES
LOSS
OOFS
BPVS
CSS
RAS
AISS
UAS
Figure 5.9
Serial 1
Serial 2
DTR Alarm OK
Alarms
Reset Timer
Alarms
Rst Alrms
000-899
Yes, No
WANsuite 5130 Alarms Menu Tree
Alarms
Network Alarm
Stats
Reset Timer
Reset Alarms
Serial
Net
15 Min Perf
000-899
Yes, No
DTR Alarm OK
ES
SES
LOS
OOFS
BPVS
CSS
RAS
AISS
UAS
Network 1 and Network 2 (5160) or Network (5130) Alarm
Status Menu
Selecting the NET or NET 1 (NET 2) ALARM STATS option displays the
Net or Net 1 (Net 2) 15 Min Perf screen. This screen provides the network
signal alarm states for the types of alarms described in the following
paragraphs.
To the right of each alarm type on the bottom line of the LCD display are two
sets of three-digit numbers separated by a slash (e.g., 000/045). The first three
digits indicate the number of errors that have occurred during the past 15
minutes. The second three digits indicate the established alarm threshold. An
5-6
WANsuite 5160/5130
asterisk (*) will appear in front of these numbers when the unit is in alarm for
that parameter.
ES
Errored Seconds − the number of seconds for which at least one bit error has
occurred. A default threshold for alarm of 45 counts has been set for this
parameter.
SES
Severely Errored Seconds − the number of seconds for which bursts of errors
have occurred during the last 15 minutes. Often the noise on the T1 link is of
an impulsive random nature. The impulse noise tends to cause several bit
errors in sequence. The line then may become quiet and error-free for most of
the time. This parameter gives a measure of the impulsive error quality of the
line. The threshold for SES is set at 5.
LOS
Loss of Signal − the number of seconds for which the receiver failed to see
received signal strength above its lower operating limit. The default alarm
threshold for this condition is set at 5.
OOFS
Out of Frame Seconds − the number of 1-second periods in which a frame
sync loss occurred. Often the receiver will be able to bridge bit errors and still
maintain frame synchronization. This is true since a frame consists of many
bits. The default alarm threshold for this condition is set at 5.
BPVS
Bipolar Violation Seconds − the number of times the signal failed to observe
the rules for changing the polarity of the logic “1” transmitted signal. The
default alarm threshold for this condition is set at 0. This means that this
alarm is initially turned off.
CSS
Controlled Slip Seconds − indicates the number of seconds during which a
timing correction was needed due to buffer under-run or overflow. The default
alarm threshold for this condition is set at 5.
RAS
Remote Alarm Seconds − the number of seconds the RAI/yellow alarm has
been reported from the remote end of the T1 link. The default alarm threshold
for this condition is set at 0. This means that this alarm is initially turned off.
AISS
Alarm Indication Signal Seconds − the number of seconds AIS has been
received. The default alarm threshold for this condition is set at 0; this means
that this alarm is initially turned off.
UAS
Unavailable Seconds − the number of seconds for which data was not
available at the T1 port. The default alarm threshold for this condition is set at
0. This means that this alarm is initially off.
NOTICE: Alarm detection and generation are per the guidelines set forth in ANSI
T1M1.3. Other relevant standards include ANSI T1.403-1989 and AT&T
PUB 54016
Front Panel LCD Interface
5-7
DTR Alarm
Read-only field that displays the current DTR Alarm status. This register
shows “OK” when no alarms are detected, and shows “ALRMD” when the
unit alarms a loss of DTR.
Reset Timer
This field is the contiguous number of seconds that an alarm parameter must
be clear before the alarm is reset. Applicable values range from 000 through
899. A value of “000” means that the alarm never resets. Press SELECT to
change this threshold.
Reset Alarms
This option clears the alarm counts. To reset the alarms, press the SCROLL
button to bring up the “Yes” option, and then press the SELECT button.
Performance Menu
The PERFORMANCE menu displays a history of the network error
parameters that are continuously monitored. This register lets you view the
24-hour performance totals from the unit. Only the 5160’s Network 1
Performance menu is shown below in Figure 5.10 because the parameters are
the same for the WANsuite 5160 Network 1 and Network 2 menus and also
for the Network menu in the WANsuite 5130.
Figure 5.10 Performance Menu Tree
Net 1
Performance
Net 1 24-hour
Perf
(read-only fields)
Rx
ES
SES
LOSS
OOFS
BPVS
CSS
RAS
AISS
UAS
CRCES
BES
LOFC
The parameters found on this menu are the same as on the Alarms menu tree,
except for the three additional parameters defined below.
5-8
WANsuite 5160/5130
CRCES
Sets the Cyclic Redundancy Check Errored Seconds (CRCES) threshold. A
CRC is a method of confirming the integrity of received data.
BES
Sets the Bursty Error Seconds (BES) threshold. A BES is a 1-second period
during which at least more than one but fewer than 320 CRC6 errors
occurred.
LOFC
The Loss of Frame Count (LOFC) represents the number of time a loss of
frame is declared. A loss of frame is declared after 2.5 seconds of continuous
loss of signal or OOF.
Maintenance Menu
The MAINTENANCE menu is used to perform loop test functions. From this
menu, Loop tests can be activated and cleared. The WANsuite 5130
Maintenance Menu Tree has the same submenus as the 5160, but does not
have the Network 2 or Serial 2 options.
Figure 5.11 Maintenance Menu Tree
Maintenance
Network 1
Loop
Setting
Pattern
Length
Sync
Elapsed
Bit Errs
ES
% EFS
Cmd
No Test
PLB
LLB
MLB
Far PLB
Far LLB
Net
Idle
Ch. 1
“
Ch. 24
QRSS
511
2047
2^15
Spaces
Marks
15 min
30 min
1 hr
24 hr
Cont
(readonly field)
(readonly field)
(readonly field)
(readonly field)
(readonly field)
Stop
Reset
Err Inject
Start
Network 2
(same as “Network 1”)
Serial 1
Loop
Setting
Pattern
Length
Sync
Elapsed
Bit Errs
ES
% EFS
Cmd
No Test
Port
V.54
Far V.54
Net
DTE
QRSS
511
2047
2^15
Spaces
Marks
15 min
30 min
1 hr
24 hr
Cont
(readonly field)
(readonly field)
(readonly field)
(readonly field)
(readonly field)
Stop
Reset
Err Inject
Start
Serial 2
(same as “Serial 1”)
Network Maintenance Menu
The following paragraphs describe the user-selectable and display-only
parameters of the 5160’s NET 1 and NET 2 and the 5130’s NET interface
maintenance menu.
Front Panel LCD Interface
5-9
Loop
Lets you specify the type of loop test (if any) performed on the selected
interface.
Values: No Test, Payload Loopback (PLB), Line Loopback (LLB),
Maintenance Loopback (MLB), Far LLB, and Far PLB
Default: No Test
Setting
Lets you specify on which channels the BERT will be performed.
Values: Net, Service, Idle, Channel 1, Channel 2, Channel 3...Channel 24
Default: Net
Pattern
Lets you specify the pattern to be transmitted during a BERT for the selected
port.
Values: QRSS, 511, 2047 2^15, Spaces, Marks
Default: QRSS
NOTICE: The 2^15 pattern is the ITU (European) version, not the ANSI version.
Length
Lets you specify the length of time that a BERT should run for the selected
interface.
Values: 15 Minutes, 30 Minutes, 1 Hour, 24 Hours, Continuous
Default: 15 Minutes
Sync
Elapsed
Display-only field shows the state of pattern sync during a BERT. If no
BERT is in progress, “No Test” is displayed. If a BERT is active, but the
receiver is not in pattern sync, “No Sync” is displayed. If the receiver is in
pattern sync, “In Sync” is displayed.
Display-only field shows the amount of time (in seconds) that has elapsed
since a BERT began or, if completed, the total test time.
Bit Errors
Display-only field shows the number of bit errors detected since the BERT
began or since error statistics were last cleared.
ES
Display-only field shows the number of asynchronous errored seconds that
have been detected since the BERT began or since error statistics were last
cleared. This parameter includes bit error seconds and sync loss seconds.
% EFS
Cmd
Display-only field shows what percent of the total test time ran error free.
This ratio is derived from the number of error free seconds divided by the
number of seconds accumulated in Elapsed Time.
Lets you control basic aspects of the BERT performed, including the injection
of errors during test.
Values: Stop, Reset, Error Inject, Start
Default: Stop
5-10
WANsuite 5160/5130
Serial Maintenance Menu
The following paragraphs describe the user-selectable and display-only
parameters of the 5160’s SERIAL 1 and SERIAL 2 and 5130’s SERIAL
interface maintenance menu.
Loop
Lets you specify the type of loop test (if any) performed on the selected serial
interface.
Values: No Test, Port, V.54, Far.V.54
Default: No Test
Setting
Lets you specify the direction towards which the BERT pattern is sent.
Values: Net, DTE
Default: Net
Pattern
Lets you specify the pattern to be transmitted during a BERT for the selected
port.
Values: QRSS, 511, 2047, 2^15, Spaces, Marks
Default: QRSS
NOTICE: The 2^15 pattern is the ITU (European) version, not the ANSI version.
Length
Lets you specify the length of time that the BERT should run for the selected
interface.
Values: 15 Minutes, 30 Minutes, 1 Hour, 24 Hours, Continuous
Default: 15 Minutes
Sync
Elapsed
Bit Errors
ES
% EFS
Display-only field shows the state of pattern sync during a BERT. If no
BERT is in progress, “No Test” is displayed. If a BERT is active but the
receiver is not in pattern sync, “No Sync” is displayed. If the receiver is in
pattern sync, “In Sync” is displayed.
Display-only field shows the amount of time (in seconds) that has elapsed
since a BERT began or, if completed, the total test time.
This display-only field shows the number of bit errors detected since the
BERT began or since error statistics were last cleared.
Display-only field shows the number of asynchronous errored seconds
detected since the BERT began or since error statistics were last cleared. This
parameter includes bit error seconds and sync loss seconds.
Display-only field shows what percent of the total test time ran error free.
This ratio is derived from the number of error free seconds divided by the
number of seconds accumulated in Elapsed Time.
Front Panel LCD Interface
5-11
Cmd
Lets you control basic aspects of the BERT performed, including the injection
of errors during test.
Values: Stop, Reset, Error Inject, Start
Default: Stop
Configuration Menu
The Configuration menu lets you configure the parameters of the various
interfaces.
Figure 5.12 WANsuite 5160 Configuration Menu Tree
Configuration
TCP/IP Config
Net 1 Config
Net 2 Config
Serial 1 Config
Serial 2 Config
Supv Config
Figure 5.13 WANsuite 5130 Configuration Menu Tree
Configuration
TCP/IP Config
Net Config
Serial Config
TCP/IP Configuration Menu
The TCP/IP CONFIG menu lets you configure the unit’s IP parameters. Use
the SCROLL button to display the desired configuration parameter, and then
press the SELECT button to activate the configuration function.
Figure 5.14 TCP/IP Configuration Menu Tree
TCP/IP Config
IP Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xx
IP Address
Subnet Mask
xxx.xxx.xxx.xx
Gateway Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xx
DHCP Client
Ethernet
Dis
En
Dis
En
This menu lets you assign a unique network address to this unit.
To establish an IP Address, press the SELECT button to activate a blinking
cursor over the first digit’s location (an “x”) in the address, indicating the
value is selected for change. Press the SCROLL button to incrementally
change the selected digit’s value (0–9). When the desired value for a selected
portion of the address is displayed, press the SELECT button to set that value
5-12
WANsuite 5160/5130
and to move to the next value in the address. Pressing the SELECT button
while the blinking cursor is on the last digit enters the value and returns to the
previous screen. Pressing the EXIT button at any time while entering an IP
address aborts the edit.
Subnet Mask
This menu lets you define the network portion of the unit’s IP address.
To establish the Subnet Mask (a number used to identify a subnetwork), press
the SELECT button to activate a blinking cursor over the first digit’s location
(an “x”) in the field, indicating that the value is selected for change. Press the
SCROLL button to incrementally change the selected digit’s value (0-9). When
the desired value for a selected portion of the field is displayed, press the
SELECT button to set that value and to move to the next value in the field.
Pressing the SELECT button while the blinking cursor is on the last digit
enters the value and returns you to the previous screen. Pressing the EXIT
button at any time while entering a Subnet Mask aborts the edit.
Gateway Address
This option lets you define the IP address of the default gateway (router) on
the LAN side of the unit.
To establish the Gateway Address, press the SELECT button to activate a
blinking cursor over the first digit’s location (an “x”) in the address,
indicating the value is selected for change. Press the SCROLL button to
incrementally change the selected digit’s value (0-9). When the desired value
for a selected portion of the address is displayed, press the SELECT button to
set that value and to move to the next value in the address. Pressing the
SELECT button while the blinking cursor is on the last digit enters the value
and returns you to the previous screen. Pressing the EXIT button at any time
while entering a Gateway address aborts the edit.
DHCP Client
If DHCP Client is enabled at power-up, the unit will request its IP, Mask, and
Gateway addresses from a DHCP server located on the LAN side of the unit,
and the unit will use these addresses. If the DHCP request is unsuccessful, the
unit will use the configured addresses shown on this screen.
NOTICE: Always verify that a DHCP server is available on the network before
enabling DHCP Client. If, on power-up, a DHCP server is not found, a
60-second timeout will occur.
Ethernet
Enables or disables a remote unit’s Ethernet port.
Network 1 (5160) or Network (5130) Configuration Menu
Use the NET 1 or NET CONFIG menu to set up parameter values for the T1
port labeled as “NET #1” on the WANsuite 5160 or “NET” on the WANsuite
5130 as shown in Figure 5.15.
Front Panel LCD Interface
5-13
Figure 5.15 Network 1 (5160) or Network (5130) Configuration Menu Tree
Net 1
Config
Mode
LBO
Framing
Long-Haul
Shrt-Haul
0
−7.5
−15.0
−22.5
ESF
D4
Coding
B8ZS
AMI
Timing
Zero Suppression
PRM
Int
Net 1
Net 2
Serial 1
Serial 2
Dis
En
Dis
En
Learn DS0 Boot
Learn DS0 As
Learn DS0 Now
The Network 1 or Network interface can have independently selected values
for the following parameters:
Mode
LBO
Selects the network service type.
Values: Long Haul, Short Haul
Default:Long Haul
Sets the transmit Line Build Out (LBO) for the network interface.
Values: 0, −7.5, −15.0, −22.5 dB
Default:0 dB
Framing
Selects the framing for the network side of the DSU/CSU.
Values
Coding
ESF, D4
Default:ESF
Sets the network side line coding.
Values: AMI, B8ZS
Default:B8ZS
Timing
Sets the timing source to synchronize the unit’s internal timing generators. In
all cases, slips are controlled to occur on frame boundaries at the Network
and/or DSX-1 ports when timing synchronization is lost. Choices are as
follows:
Network 1 (5160) − Int, Net 1, Net 2, Serial 1, Serial 2
Network 2 (5160) − Int, Net 2, Serial 2
Network (5130) − Int, Net, Serial
Definitions of the timing sources are as follows:
Internal – The unit’s internal frequency standard (T1 1.544 Mbps ± 50 bps)
is used for all timing.
5-14
WANsuite 5160/5130
Network 1, Network 2, Network – Timing is derived from the Network port
recovered clock.
Serial 1, Serial 2, Serial – Timing is derived from the Serial port recovered
clock.
Zero Suppression
Determines whether ones density insertion is activated after 15 zeros. This
parameter is ignored if the Coding parameter is set to “B8ZS”.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default:Disable
PRM
Learn DS0 Boot
Lets you establish which performance messaging standard will be employed
to initiate Performance Report Message (PRM) functions. Setting this field to
“Enable” instructs the unit to use ANSI T1.403, which sends a PRM once
every second. Setting this field to “Disable” instructs the unit to use AT&T
TR54016, which provides performance reporting on request only.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default:Disable
Determines if the unit will attempt to discover active DS0s (after power-up,
Save and Restart). Active DS0s will then be assigned to the first associated
network service.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
Learned DS0 As
Specifies the rate at which each discovered DS0 will be set.
Values: As 56K/64K
Default: As 64K
Learn DS0 Now
Learns which DS0s are active and assigns them to the first associated network
service. Learned DS0s are based on the idle pattern specified in the Channel
Table.
Network 2 Configuration Menu (5160 Only)
The NET 2 CONFIG menu is used to set up parameter values for the port
labeled as “NET #2” on the WANsuite 5160.
Front Panel LCD Interface
5-15
Figure 5.16 Network 2 Configuration Menu Tree
Net 2
Config
Mode
LBO
Level
Framing
Coding
Long-Haul
Shrt-Haul
0
−7.5
−15.0
−22.5
0-110
111-220
221-330
331-440
441-550
551-660
>661
ESF
D4
B8ZS
AMI
Timing
Zero Suppression
PRM
Int
Net 2
Serial 2
Dis
En
Dis
En
Channel Map
Channel 1
Idle
Thru
T+Sig
Channel 24
Idle
Thru
T+Sig
Learn DS0 Boot
Mode
LBO
Learn DS0 As
Learn DS0 Now
Selects the network service type.
Values: Long Haul, Short Haul
Default:Long Haul
Sets the transmit Line Build Out (LBO) for the network interface.
Values: 0, −7.5, −15.0, −22.5 dB
Default:0 dB
Level
Framing
Specifies the DTE DSX-1 interface output level.
Values: 0−110, 111−220, 221−330, 331−440, 441−550, 551−660, >661 ft
Default:0−110 ft
Selects the framing for the network side of the DSU/ CSU.
Values
Coding
ESF, D4
Default:ESF
Sets the network side line coding.
Values: AMI, B8ZS
Default:B8ZS
Timing
5-16
Sets the timing source to synchronize the unit’s internal timing generators. In
all cases, slips are controlled to occur on frame boundaries at the Network
ports when timing synchronization is lost. The options are as follows:
WANsuite 5160/5130
In Slave mode − timing parameter is ignored in Slave mode
In Network mode − Internal, Network 2, Serial 2
Definitions of the timing sources are as follows:
Internal – The unit’s internal frequency standard (T1 1.544 Mbps ± 50 bps)
is used for all timing.
Network 2 – Timing is derived from the Network port recovered clock.
Serial 2 – Timing is derived from the Serial port recovered clock.
Zero Suppression
Determines whether ones density insertion is activated after 15 zeros. This
parameter is ignored if the Coding parameter is set to “B8ZS”.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default:Disable
PRM
Channel Map Menu
Lets you establish which performance messaging standard will be employed
to initiate Performance Report Message (PRM) functions. Setting this field to
“Enable” instructs the unit to use ANSI T1.403, which sends a PRM once
every second. Setting this field to “Disable” instructs the unit to use AT&T
TR54016, which provides performance reporting on request only.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default:Disable
The Channel Map menu allows channels to be allocated/unallocated to the
Net 2 interface. The values for this option are as follows:
•
•
•
Idle − Channel not allocated
Thru − Allocated to NET 2
T+Sig − Allocate and Signaling enabled
There is no default value for this option.
Serial 1 and Serial 2 (5160) or Serial (5130) Configuration
Menus
The SERIAL INTERFACE #1 and SERIAL INTERFACE #2 configuration
menus on the WANsuite 5160 and the SERIAL INTERFACE on the
WANsuite 5130 let you view and make changes to the unit’s serial interface
configurations.
Front Panel LCD Interface
5-17
Figure 5.17 Serial 1 and Serial 2 (5160) or Serial (5130)
Configuration Menu Tree
Serial 1
Configuration
Serial 2
Configuration
Type
Mode
DSR
DCD
CTS
RTS
RTS Delay
Tx Clock
V.35
RS-232
EIA-530
DCE
DTE
True
False
Int
True
False
Int
True
False
Int
Normal
True
Normal
Long
Int
Ext
Inv Clock
Rate
Dis
En
Nx56K
Nx64K
(N = 1–32)
Channel
Rate
Bundling
Nx64K
Nx56K
Cont
Alt
Start
Channel
No. of
Channels
1–24
1–24
V.54
LL
DTR Alrm
Dis
En
Dis
En
Dis
En
Use the SERIAL 1 CONFIG and SERIAL 2 CONFIG (5160) or the SERIAL
CONFIG (5130) to set the configuration parameters defined in the following
paragraphs. On the WANsuite 5160, the submenus and options are the same
for both SERIAL 1 CONFIG and SERIAL 2 CONFIG menus.
Type
This parameter selects the type of interface (based on its electrical signal
characteristics) used by the equipment connected to the Serial port.
Values: V.35, RS-232, EIA-530
Default:V.35
NOTICE: V.35 requires the use of an optional cable. Refer to Optional Equipment
on page A-6 for ordering information.
Mode
By default, the Serial port serves as a DCE port in both Packet and TDM
modes. However, the Serial port can serve as a DTE port when the unit is in
Packet mode.
If the Serial port connects to a DTE device (such as a FRAD or a router), the
Mode parameter must be set to “DCE.” If this port connects to a DCE device
(such as a DSU/CSU), this parameter must be set to “DTE” (valid only for
Packet mode, not TDM).
Values: DCE, DTE
Default:DCE
NOTICE: DTE mode requires the use of an optional DTE cable. Refer to
Appendix A,"Specifications," for ordering information.
5-18
WANsuite 5160/5130
DSR
Data Set Ready can be set to “True,” “False,” or “Internal.” The “Internal”
option sets DSR “On” if the port is enabled and “Off” if the port is disabled.
Values: True, False, Internal
Default:True
DCD
The Data Carrier Detect parameter can be set to “True,” “False,” or
“Internal.” If set to “Internal,” DCD is “On” when network carrier is being
received from the remote end, and is “Off” when network carrier is not being
received from the far end.
Values: True, False, Internal
Default:True
CTS
The Clear To Send parameter can be set to “True” or “False.” If this
parameter is set to “Internal,” the CTS control lead follows the RTS control
lead from the DTE after a delay of a duration established by the RTS Delay
parameter.
Values: True, False, Internal
Default:True
RTS
The Request To Send parameter determines where the unit reads the RTS
signal status from. If set to “Normal,” the unit gets RTS from the Serial pin. If
set to “True,” RTS is always perceived as “On.”
Values: Normal, True
Default:Normal
RTS Delay
The RTS Delay parameter determines how long the unit waits before it
changes the level of CTS to match RTS when the CTS parameter is set to
“Internal.”
Values: Normal (~30 ms delay), Long (~100 ms delay)
Default:Normal
Tx Clock
Used to select the clock that the unit uses to sample the data transmitted from
the DTE. When set to “Internal,” the data is sampled directly with the
transmit data clock that is also supplied to the DTE as Transmit Clock.
Values: Internal, External
Default:Internal
Inv Clock
Rate
For use in DTE Packet mode to change the clock edge of the transmitted data.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default:Disable
If the port is running in Packet mode, the Rate must be configured to the
desired port speed. In TDM mode, the port speed rate will be set by
configuring the next four parameters (Start Channel, Number of Channels,
Front Panel LCD Interface
5-19
Bundling, and Channel Rate). The menu displays the calculated rate in
kilobits per second.
Values: Nx56K, Nx64K, where N = 1−32
Default:1536 kbps
Channel Rate
The unit can operate at any data rate that is a multiple of 56 or 64 kbps. If
“Νx64K” is selected, the ones density requirements of the T1 network line
must be ensured. If “Νx56K” is selected, ones density for the selected DS0
channel is maintained. The menu displays the calculated rate in kilobits per
second.
Values: Nx56K, Nx64K
Default:Nx64K
Bundling
Selects whether the DTE channel assignment is made as a “Contiguous”
group or as “Alternate” channels. Selecting “Alternate” ensures ones density.
Because the unit allows individual channels to be configured for a service, a
value of “Arbitrary” will be returned for this parameter if the current channel
allocation is not contiguous or Alternate. The “Arbitrary” value can only be
supplied by the unit − it cannot be set by the user.
Values: Contiguous, Alternate
Default:Contiguous
NOTICE: Because the “Alternate” Bundling option works by stuffing even
channels with ones (1’s) and using odd channels for data, the available
bandwidth is actually half of that selected.
Start Channel
Selects the starting channel in the 24-channel DS1 bit stream. Starting with
the specified channel, the unit automatically assigns the channels that follow.
Values: 1 through 24
Default:1
Number of Channels
This display-only field shows the number of channels to be passed through to
the DTE.
Values: 0 through 24
Default:24
V.54
Selecting “Enable” allows the unit to respond to in-band V.54 loop codes. If
you select “Disable,” the unit ignores these codes.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default:Disable
LL
5-20
The Local Loopback parameter can be set to “Enable” or “Disable.” Selecting
“Enable” allows the unit to go into Local Loop when the LL pin on the Serial
port goes high. The unit exits the loop when the LL pin goes low. If you
select “Disable,” the unit ignores the LL pin on the Serial port.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default:Disable
WANsuite 5160/5130
For more information on pin assignments, refer to Serial Interface Pin
Assignments, DTE Mode (Packet Use Only) on page A-7 and Serial Interface
Pin Assignments, DCE Mode on page A-9.
DTR Alrm
This lets you set the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) alarm control parameters.
Choices for DTR Alarm Control are “Enable” and “Disable.” Setting DTR
Alarm Control to “Enable” allows the unit to go into alarm on a loss of DTR.
Values: Disable, Enable
Default:Disable
Supervisory Configuration Menu
Use the SUPV menu to set up parameter values for the Supervisory port as
shown in Figure 5.18 and defined in the paragraphs below.
Figure 5.18 Supervisory Configuration Menu
Supv
Config
Speed
1200, 2400,
4800,9600,
19200, 38400,
57600, 115200
Speed
Ch Size
Stop Bits
Parity
DTR Alarm
Diag Msgs
Ch Size
Stop Bits
Parity
DTR Alarm
Diag Msgs
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
1
2
None
Odd
Even
Dis
En
Dis
En
Changes the Supervisory port speed (in bits per second).
Values: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
Default: 19200
Selects the number of bits required to make up one asynchronous character.
Values: Five, Six, Seven, Eight
Default: Eight
Selects the number of bits required to end the character.
Values: 1, 2
Default: 1
Sets the parity bit if the port is asynchronous.
Values: None, Odd, Even
Default: None
Sets the DTR Alarm.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Disable
Enables the Supervisory port to send out diagnostic messages upon power-up.
Values: Enable, Disable
Default: Enable
Front Panel LCD Interface
5-21
NOTICE: When in SCADA mode, these diagnostic messages disrupt the connected
device. Therefore, if using the SCADA mode, set this value to
“Disable.”
Utilities Menu
The UTILITIES menu is used to display and change some system operational
configurations.
Figure 5.19 Utilities Menu Tree
Utilities
Save and Restart
Status
Maint Rst
Not Needed
Required
Recommended
No
Save
TDM
Pkt
Pkt 2
Pkt 3
Pkt 4
Set
Password
LCD E/D
Enter Password
Maintenance Reset
This screen allows the user to reset the unit to its factory default TDM or
Packet configuration for all unit parameter values. Use the “Save” option to
write the current configuration to the unit’s non-volatile memory. The “No”
option is displayed as a null state only before the user selects and scrolls
through Maintenance Reset options − it serves as protection from accidentally
resetting the unit.
Values: No, TDM, Save, Packet, Packet 2, Packet 3, Packet 4
Default:No
Set Password
The Set Password screen lets you establish or change an access password for
entry to and control of the front panel interface. The password will consist of
selection of up to eight alphanumeric characters. After selecting and exiting
password entry, the front panel will require this same selection of coded
values to be entered prior to the display moving beyond the “idle” screen.
Select the Set Password option to open the ENTER PASSWORD screen; a
blinking cursor appears over the first character or digit to be entered or
modified. To establish a unit password, press the SCROLL button to increment
the characters and digits (0–9, A–Z, a–z). Pressing the SELECT button
accepts the value and moves the cursor to the right. After entering all the
characters that define your password, press the SELECT button; the menu will
then prompt you to “Verify” the password. Reenter the password exactly as
before and again press SELECT. A correctly entered password advances the
5-22
WANsuite 5160/5130
unit to the Main Menu screen. An incorrectly entered password returns you to
an “Idle” screen. If unsuccessful, reenter the password.
To disable the password function, select the Set Password option and then,
without pressing the SCROLL button, press the SELECT button until the
cursor passes through all eight character spaces. The menu will then prompt
you to “Verify” the password. Reenter the password exactly as before and
again press SELECT.
LCD E/D
Lets the user enable or disable the LCD interface buttons of the unit.
NOTICE: If you set this parameter to “Disable,” you will immediately lock
yourself out of the LCD interface.
Log Out Menu
If the unit is not programmed with a password, you can end the session with
the computer and leave the menu system by pressing EXIT while in the Main
Menu. If a password has been programmed, the unit prevents an inadvertent
log out by requiring you to press SELECT in the Log Out menu.
Front Panel LCD Interface
5-23
5-24
WANsuite 5160/5130
APPENDIX
A
SPECIFICATIONS
APPENDIX A
Network 1 (or Network) Interface
Line Rate:
1.544 Mbps (±50 bps)
Line Framing:
D4 or ESF
Line Code:
AMI or B8ZS
Input Signal:
DS1, +1 to − 27 dB (ALBO)
Connection:
RJ-48C jack, 100 Ω (±5%)
Output Signal:
3.0 V (± 10%) base- peak into 100 Ω with protection
Mode:
Long-haul, Short-haul
DSX-1 Level:
0-110, 111-220, 221-330, 331-440, 441-550, 551-660,
>661 ft
Line Build Out:
0, − 7.5, − 15, − 22.5 dB attenuation
Transient Voltage:
1000 V protection, fused input/output
Jitter Control:
per TR 62411 and T1.403
Timing Source:
5160: With “Function” parameter on Network 2 screen in
Slave mode, options are Internal, Network 1, Network 2,
Serial 1, Serial 2
With “Function” parameter on Network 2 screen in Network
mode, options are Internal, Network 1, Serial 1
5130: Internal, Network, Serial
Ones Density:
B8ZS, N x 56 bit stuffing, alternate fill; complies with TR
62411
Network 2 Interface (5160 Only)
Line Rate:
1.544 Mbps (±50 bps)
Line Framing:
D4 or ESF
Line Code:
AMI or B8ZS
Input Signal:
DSX-1 to −6 dB
Connection:
RJ-48C jack, 100 Ω (± 5%)
Output Signal:
3.0 V (± 10%) base- peak into 100 Ω with protection
Specifications
A-1
Mode:
Long-haul, Short-haul
DSX-1 Level:
0-110, 111-220, 221-330, 331-440, 441-550, 551-660,
>661 ft
Line Build Out:
0, − 7.5, − 15, − 22.5 dB attenuation
Transient Voltage:
1000 V protection, fused input/output
Jitter Control:
Per TR 62411 and T1.403
Timing Source:
With “Function” parameter in Slave mode, timing parameter
is ignored
With “Function” parameter in Network mode, options are
Internal, Network 2, Serial 2
Ones Density:
B8ZS, N x 56 bit stuffing, alternate fill; complies with TR
62411
Serial Interface(s)
Connection:
DB-25 female
DTE Ports:
Selectable RS-530, RS-232, or V.35
Data Rate:
Synchronous, n x 56 kbps or nx 64 kbps (where n = 1–32)
Clocking:
Internal, External
IP Gateway
10/100 Ethernet (IP Gateway or Management)
Protocols:
RIP1, RIP2, OSPF
Connection:
8-pin modular
Network Protocol:
TCP/IP based networks
Data Rate:
10/100 Mbps
Compatibility:
10/100Base-T
Management Interfaces
10/100 Ethernet (Management or IP Gateway)
Connection:
8-pin modular
Network Protocol:
TCP/IP based networks
Data Rate:
10/100 Mbps
Compatibility:
10/100Base-T
Supervisory Port
Connection:
DB-9 female
Data Rates:
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps
(default: 19.2 kbps)
Performance:
15-minute, 24-hr, and 30-day monitoring (sampled every
second)
Diagnostics
A-2
WANsuite 5160/5130
Network Loops:
Line loopback, payload loopback, or maintenance loopback
(see Figures A-1 and A-2)
Fractional Loop:
Generates and responds to in-band V.54 loop code
DTE Port Loops:
V.54 and Local
BERT:
Multiple test patterns toward network or DTE ports with
error inject
Activation:
Programmable thresholds on all interfaces
Reporting:
SNMP traps, e-mail notification
100-240 VAC:
7 W maximum
18−150 VDC
10 W maximum
Mounting:
Standalone
Dimensions:
Width 11.75 inches (29.845 cm)
Alarms
Power
Mechanical
Height 1.86 inches (4.724 cm)
Depth 8.75 inches (22.225 cm)
Weight:
2.13 pounds (0.97 kg)
Operating Temp:
32 to 122 °F (0 to 50 °C)
Storage Temp:
− 4 to 149 °F (− 20° to 65 °C)
Humidity:
95% maximum (non condensing)
Environmental
Specifications
A-3
Figure A.1 Loopback Diagrams
WANsuite 5160
Network
Framer
Network
Port
T1
Port
Logic
Nx64
Port
Internal Logic
LLB
WANsuite 5160
Network
Framer
Network
Port
T1
Port
Logic
Nx64
Port
Internal Logic
PLB
WANsuite 5160
Network
Framer
Network
Port
T1
Port
Logic
AIS
Nx64
Port
Internal Logic
MLB
WANsuite 5160
Network
Port
T1
Network
Framer
Port
Logic
Internal Logic
Port Loop
A-4
WANsuite 5160/5130
Nx64
Port
Frame Relay Statistics Collected in 96 15-minute Intervals
Per Port
Tx/Rx frames
Tx/Rx octets
Tx/Rx Mgmt frames
Tx/Rx Mgmt octets
Rx frames with FECN
Rx frames with BECN
Rx invalid frames
Tx/Rx status inquiry frames
Tx/Rx status response frames
Rx invalid LMI frames
Frame delivery ratio
Data delivery ratio
Peak/average throughput
Per DLCI
Tx/Rx frames
Tx/Rx octets
Rx frames with FECN
Rx frames with BECN
Rx frames with DE bit set
Tx excess CIR
Tx excess Be
Tx/Rx mgmt frames
Tx/Rx mgmt octets
Peak/average throughput
Peak/average round-trip delay
Round-trip delay time-outs
UAS (unavailable seconds)
PPP Statistics Collected in 96 15-minute Intervals
Per Port
Tx/Rx frames
Tx/Rx octets
Tx/Rx mgmt frames
Tx/Rx mgmt octets
Rx invalid frames
Peak/average throughput
Industry Listings
FCC Compliance:
Part 15 Class A, Subpart B, Part 68
U.S. Safety:
UL 1950 3rd edition
Specifications
A-5
Canadian Safety:
CSA C22.2 No. 950-95
Industry Canada:
CS-03, Issue 8Standards
TR62411:
December 1990
TR54016:
September 1989
ANSI T1.403:
1995
TR54019A:
April 1988
Ethernet:
ISO/IEC 8802-3
Internet:
RFC1907
RFC1573
RFC2863
RFC2493
RFC2115
RFC2495
RFC2011
RFC2012
RFC2013
RFC2096
RFC2571
ds8200tc.mib
ds8200v2.mib
ipadv2.mib
ipstart.mib
router.mib
hdsl2.mib|
RFC1490
Ordering Information
Each WANsuite 5160/5130 unit ships with the following standard equipment:
Description
T1 Network Cable (RJ-48−RJ-48)
Power Supply
Cord for Power Supply
Serial (SUPV) Cable (DB-9 male to DB-9 female)
Verilink Documentation CD
Optional Equipment
The following optional equipment is available for use with the WANsuite
5160/5130:
Description
Serial (DCE) Cable (DB-25–DB-25, M/M, pin/pin) (EIA530/RS232), 6-ft
Serial (DCE) Cable (DB-25–Winchester 34-pin (V.35) M/M, pin/pin), 5-ft
Serial (DCE) Cable (DB-25–Winchester 34-pin (V.35) M/M, pin/pin), 10-ft
Serial (DCE) Cable (DB-25–V.35, M/F, pin/pin), 5-ft
A-6
WANsuite 5160/5130
Description
Serial (DTE) Cable (DB-25–DB25, M/M, crossed), 6-ft
Serial (DTE) Cable (DB-25–V.35, M/M, crossed), 5-ft
Serial (DCE) Cable (DB-25−Cisco DB60), 10-ft
Rack Mount, 19-in., for Single Stand-alone Unit
Rack Mount, 23-in., for Single Stand-alone Unit
For further ordering information, contact Technical Support (page xii).
Connector Pin Assignments
The Serial Interface is a standard DB-25 jack.
Serial Interface Pin Assignments, DTE Mode (Packet Use Only)
Pin #
Function
Abbrev.
Direction
DB-25*
RS-232
V.35
EIA-530
Frame Ground
FG
n/a
1
1
A
1
Transmit Data
TD
Output
3
2
P
2
Receive Data
RD
Input
2
3
R
3
Request to Send
RTS
Output
5
4
C
4
Clear to Send
CTS
Input
4
5
D
5
Data Set Ready
DSR
Input
20
6
E
6
Signal Ground
SG
n/a
7
7
B
7
Data Carrier Detect
DCD
Input
8
8
F
8
Balanced Receiver Clock
(B)RC
Input
12
X
9
Balanced Data Carrier Detect
(B)DCD
Input
10
Balanced External Transmitter Clock
(B)ETC
Balanced Transmitter Clock
(B)TC
Input
11
Balanced Clear to Send
(B)CTS
Input
19
Balanced Transmit Data
(B)TD
Output
16
TC
Input
24
(B)RD
Input
14
Receiver Clock
RC
Input
15
Local Loopback
Loop 3
Output
18
Balanced Request to Send
(B)RTS
Output
13
DTR
Output
6
20
n/a
21
21
Transmitter Clock
Balanced Receive Data
Data Terminal Ready
(Not used)
10
AA
12
13
S
14
Y
15
T
16
17
V
17
18
J
18
15
19
H
20
21
Balanced Data Set Ready
(B)DSR
Input
23
22
Balanced Data Terminal Ready
(B)DTR
Output
22
23
Specifications
A-7
Pin #
Function
External Transmitter Clock
(Not used)
Abbrev.
Direction
DB-25*
RS-232
n/a
25
25
WANsuite 5160/5130
EIA-530
ETC
*This refers to the DB-25 Serial interface connector on the back of the unit.
A-8
V.35
25
Serial Interface Pin Assignments, DCE Mode
Pin #
Function
Abbrev.
Direction
DB-25*
RS-232
V.35
EIA-530
Frame Ground
FG
n/a
1
1
A
1
Transmit Data
TD
Input
2
2
P
2
Receive Data
RD
Output
3
3
R
3
Request to Send
RTS
Input
4
4
C
4
Clear to Send
CTS
Output
5
5
D
5
Data Set Ready
DSR
Output
6
6
E
6
Signal Ground
SG
n/a
7
7
B
7
Data Carrier Detect
DCD
Output
8
8
F
8
Balanced Receiver Clock
(B)RC
Output
9
X
9
Balanced Data Carrier Detect
(B)DCD
Output
10
Balanced External Transmitter Clock
(B)ETC
Input
11
W
11
Balanced Transmitter Clock
(B)TC
Output
12
AA
12
Balanced Clear to Send
(B)CTS
Output
13
Balanced Transmit Data
(B)TD
Input
14
TC
Output
15
(B)RD
Output
16
Receiver Clock
RC
Output
17
Local Loopback
Loop 3
Input
18
Balanced Request to Send
(B)RTS
Input
19
DTR
Input
20
20
n/a
21
21
Transmitter Clock
Balanced Receive Data
Data Terminal Ready
(not used)
10
13
S
14
Y
15
T
16
17
V
17
18
J
18
15
19
H
20
21
Balanced Data Set Ready
(B)DSR
Output
22
22
Balanced Data Terminal Ready
(B)DTR
Input
23
23
ETC
Input
24
24
n/a
25
25
External Transmitter Clock
(Not Used)
U
24
25
*This refers to the DB-25 Serial interface connector on the back of the unit.
Ethernet Connection Pin Assignments
The 10/100 ETHERNET interface is an 8-pin modular jack that complies with
standard twisted-pair, 10Base-T requirements.
Pin
Ethernet Interface
1
Data Out (+)
2
Data Out (-)
3
Data In (+)
6
Data In (-)
Specifications
A-9
Network 1 (5160) or Network (5130) Interface Pin
Assignments
The NET 1 physical interface is a standard RJ-48C, 8 -pin modular jack. The
following table displays the pinout assignments.
Pin
T1 NET Interface
1
Data In
2
Data In
3, 6
Not used
4
Data Out
5
Data Out
7, 8
Chassis Ground
Network 2 (5160 Only) Interface Pin Assignments
The NET 2 physical interface is a standard RJ-48C, 8 -pin modular jack. The
following table displays the pinout assignments.
Pin
T1 NET Interface
1
Data Out
2
Data Out
3, 6
Not used
4
Data In
5
Data In
7, 8
Chassis Ground
Supervisory Port Pin Assignments
The SUPERVISORY PORT interface is a standard DB-9, 9-pin modular jack.
The following table displays the pinout assignments.
A-10
Pin
DCE Mode
DTE Mode
1
DCD out
LL out
2
Rx Data out
Tx Data out
3
Tx Data in
Rx Data in
4
DTR in
DSR in
5
Signal Ground
Signal Ground
6
DSR out
DTR out
7
RTS in
CTS in
8
CTS out
RTS out
9
No connect
No connect
WANsuite 5160/5130
APPENDIX
B
SNMP AGENT
APPENDIXB
Introduction
This chapter provides specific information for configuring and using the
SNMP agent within the WANsuite 5160/5130.
The WANsuite 5160/5130 incorporates an Ethernet card that provides
connectivity for LAN-based management stations. The embedded TCP/IP
Protocol Stack allows remote access from both private networks and the
Internet.
SNMP Configuration Parameters
To access the SNMP agent, you must have an SNMP management
application, such as HP’s OpenViewâ or Sun’s NetManagerä . Access to the
agent is controlled by three community strings, read-access, write-access, and
trap-access (the community string sent with an SNMP trap). Configuration of
these community strings within the WANsuite 5160/5130 is accomplished via
the HTTP (web browser) interface. Please refer to Chapter 3, Web Server
Interface, for instructions on how this is performed.
The defaults for these strings are “public” for read-access, “private” for writeaccess, and “public” for trap-access. Ensure that your SNMP management
application is configured for whatever access strings you use.
SNMP MIBs
The WANsuite 5160/5130 supports the following industry-standard MIB
(management information base) files:
•
•
rfc1907.mib
− SNMPv2 entities (initial revision published as RFC 1450)
rfc1573.mib
− defines the IANAifType textual convention, and thus the
enumerated values of the ifType object defined in MIB-II’s
ifTable
SNMP Agent
B-1
•
rfc2863.mib
− describes generic objects for network interface sub-layers
(This MIB is an updated version of MIB-II's ifTable, and
incorporates the extensions defined in RFC 1229.)
•
rfc2493.mib
− provides textual conventions to be used by systems
supporting 15-minute based performance history counts
•
•
•
rfc2115.mib
− describes the use of a Frame Relay interface by a DTE
rfc2495.mib
− describes DS1, E1, DS2 and E2 interfaces objects
rfc2011.mib
− for managing IP and ICMP implementations, but excluding
their management of IP routes
•
•
•
•
rfc2012.mib
− for managing TCP implementations
rfc2013.mib
− for managing UDP implementations
rfc2096.mib
− for the display of CIDR multipath IP routes
rfc2571.mib
− the SNMP Management Architecture MIB
The WANsuite 5160/5130 support the following Enterprise-specific MIBs:
•
•
•
ds8200tc.mib − textual conventions used by DS8200 MIB
ipadv2.mib
− provides Frame Relay, PPP, and Service Aware
configuration and statistics
•
•
•
•
•
ipstart.mib
− MIB module for synchronous PPP Monitor
router.mib
− provides configuration of OSPF router
hdsl2.mib
− MIB module for HDSL
ds8200v2.mib − provides T1 configuration and statistics information
ipaddhcp.mib − ΜΙΒ module for DHCP
ipadnat.mib
− MIB module for NAT
These MIB files may be found on the Verilink Documentation CD included
with the unit.
SNMP Trap Configuration
The WANsuite 5160/5130 supports up to eight IP destinations for SNMP
traps. These may be configured either through the Web interface or through
an SNMP management application. For configuration of these destinations
through an SNMP management application, use a MIB browser to access the
table trapdest within ipadv2.mib and set the IP addresses of the host
computer running the management application(s). Entering an IP address of
0.0.0.0 will disable the entry.
The following traps are currently defined in the SNMP MIBs supported by
WANsuite. VarBinds heading lists additional information that is sent in the
SNMP trap message to provide details about the event.
B-2
WANsuite 5160/5130
Generic Traps
Trap
No.
Description
VarBinds
coldStart
snmpTraps 1
A coldStart trap signifies that the
SNMPv2 entity, acting in an agent
role, is reinitializing itself and that
its configuration may have been
altered.
warmStart
snmpTraps 2
A warmStart trap signifies that the
SNMPv2 entity, acting in an agent
role, is reinitializing itself such that
its configuration is unaltered.
linkDown
snmpTraps 3
A linkDown trap signifies that the
SNMP entity, acting in an agent role,
has detected that the ifOperStatus
object for one of its communication
links is about to enter the down state
from some other state (but not from
the notPresent state). This other
state is indicated by the included
value of ifOperStatus.
ifIndex,
ifAdminStatus,
ifOperStatus
linkUp
snmpTraps 4
A linkUp trap signifies that the
SNMP entity, acting in an agent role,
has detected that the ifOperStatus
object for one of its communication
links left the down state and
transitioned into some other state
(but not into the notPresent state).
This other state is indicated by the
included value of ifOperStatus.
ifIndex,
ifAdminStatus,
ifOperStatus
authenticationFalure
snmpTraps 5
An authenticationFailure trap
signifies that the SNMPv2 entity,
acting in an agent role, has received
a protocol message that is not
properly authenticated. While all
implementations of the SNMPv2
must be capable of generating this
trap, the snmpEnableAuthenTraps
object indicates whether this trap
will be generated.
SNMP Agent
B-3
Standard Traps
Trap
B-4
No.
Description
VarBinds
dsx1LineStatusChange
ds1Traps 0 1
A dsx1LineStatusChange trap is sent
when the value of an instance
dsx1LineStatus changes. It can be
utilized by an NMS to trigger polls.
When the line status change results
from a higher level line status
change (i.e. ds3), then no traps for
the ds1 are sent.
dsx1LineStatus,
dsx1LineStatusLastChange
frDLCIStatusChange
frEnterprise 1
This trap indicates that the indicated
Virtual Circuit has changed state. It
has either been created or
invalidated, or has toggled between
the active and inactive states. If,
however, the reason for the state
change is due to the DLCMI going
down, per-DLCI traps should not be
generated
IfrCircuitIfIndex,
FrCircuitDlci,
FrCircuitState
WANsuite 5160/5130
Soon-To-Be-Standard Traps
The HDSL2 MIB is on the verge of becoming an RFC.
hdsl2ShdslTraps OBJECT IDENTIFIER
::= { hdsl2ShdslLineMib 2 }
hdsl2ShdslTrapsPrefix OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { hdsl2ShdslTraps 0 }
Trap
No.
Description
VarBinds
hdsl2ShdslLoopAttenCrossing
Trap
1
This trap indicates that the loop
attenuation threshold (as per the
hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshLoopAttenu
ation value) has been reached/exceeded
for the HDSL2/SHDSL segment
endpoint identified by the ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide, and
hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair values.
ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurrAtn,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshLoopAttenua
tion
hdsl2ShdslSNRMarginCrossing
Trap
2
This trap indicates that the SNR margin
threshold (as per the
hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshSNRMargin
value) has been reached/exceeded for
the HDSL2/SHDSL segment endpoint
identified by the ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide, and
hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair values.
ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurrSnrMgn,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshSNRMargin
hdsl2ShdslPerfESThreshTrap
3
This trap indicates that the errored
seconds threshold (as per the
hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshES value)
has been reached/ exceeded for the
HDSL2/SHDSL segment endpoint
identified by the ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide, and
hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair values.
ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurr15MinES,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshES
hdsl2ShdslPerfSESThreshTrap
4
This trap indicates that the severely
errored seconds threshold (as per the
hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshSES value)
has been reached/exceeded for the
HDSL2/SHDSL Segment Endpoint
identified by the ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide, and
hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair values.
ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurr15MinSES,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshSES
hdsl2ShdslPerfCRCanomalies
ThreshTrap
5
This trap indicates that CRC anomalies
threshold (as per the
hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshCRCanomol
ies value) has been reached/exceeded
for the HDSL2/SHDSL Segment
Endpoint identified by the ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide, and
hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair values.
ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurr15MinCRCano
molies,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshCRCanomoli
es
SNMP Agent
B-5
B-6
hdsl2ShdslPerfLOSWSThresh
Trap
6
This trap indicates that the LOSW
seconds threshold (as per the
hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshLOSWS
value) has been reached/exceeded for
the HDSL2/SHDSL Segment Endpoint
identified by the ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide, and
hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair values.
ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurr15MinLOSWS,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshLOSWS
hdsl2ShdslPerfUASThreshTrap
7
This trap indicates that unavailable
seconds threshold (as per the
hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshUAS value)
has been reached/exceeded for the
HDSL2/SHDSL Segment Endpoint
identified by the ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide, and
hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair values.
ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurr15MinUAS
hdsl2ShdslEndpointThreshUAS
hdsl2ShdslSpanInvalidNum
Repeaters
8
This trap indicates that a mismatch has
been detected between the number of
repeater/regenerator units configured
for a HDSL2/SHDSL line via the
hdsl2ShdslSpanConfNumRepeaters
object and the actual number of
repeater/regenerator units discovered
via the EOC.
ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslSpanConfNumRepeaters
hdsl2ShdslLoopbackFailure
9
This trap indicates that an endpoint
maintenance loopback command failed
for an HDSL2/SHDSL segment.
ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,
hdsl2ShdslMaintLoopbackConfig
hdsl2ShdslpowerBackoff
10
This trap indicates that the bit setting
for powerBackoff in the
hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurrStatus object
for this endpoint has changed.
ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair
hdsl2ShdsldeviceFault
11
This trap indicates that the bit setting
for deviceFault in the
hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurrStatus object
for this endpoint has changed.
ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair
hdsl2ShdsldcContinuityFault
12
This trap indicates that the bit setting
for dcContinuityFault in the
hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurrStatus object
for this endpoint has changed.
ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair
hdsl2ShdslconfigInitFailure
13
This trap indicates that the bit setting
for configInitFailure in the
hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurrStatus object
for this endpoint has changed.
ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair
hdsl2ShdslprotocolInitFailure
14
This trap indicates that the bit setting
for protocolInitFailure in the
hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurrStatus object
for this endpoint has changed.
ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair
WANsuite 5160/5130
hdsl2ShdslnoNeighborPresent
15
This trap indicates that the bit setting
for noNeighborPresent in the
hdsl2ShdslEndpointCurrStatus object
for this endpoint has changed.
ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointSide,
hdsl2ShdslEndpointWirePair
hdsl2ShdsllocalPowerLoss
16
This trap indicates impending unit
failure due to loss of local power (last
gasp).
ifIndex,
hdsl2ShdslInvIndex
SNMP Agent
B-7
Enterprise-Specific Traps
ipadTrapsPrefix
B-8
Trap
No.
Description
ipadFrPortRxInvalidFramesExceeded
25000
This trap is sent out when an ipad
frame relay port receive invalid
frames alarm threshold has been
exceeded.
ipadFrPortRxInvAlmAlarm
ipadFrPortRxThroughputExceeded
25001
This trap is sent out when an ipad
frame relay port receive
throughput threshold has been
exceeded.
ipadFrPortRxAlmAlarm
ipadFrPortTxThroughputExceeded
25002
This trap is sent out when an ipad
frame relay port transmit
throughput threshold has been
exceeded.
ipadFrPortTxAlmAlarm
ipadDLCItxCIRexceeded
25003
This trap is sent out when the Tx
over CIR threshold has been
exceeded. This threshold is the
number of frames in excess of
CIR.
ipadDLCItxExCIRAlarm
ipadDLCItxBEexceeded
25004
This trap is sent out when the Tx
over Be threshold has been
exceeded. This threshold is the
number of frames in excess of Be.
ipadDLCItxExBeAlarm
ipadDLCIRxCongestionExceeded
25005
This trap is sent out when the Rx
congestion threshold has been
exceeded. This threshold is the
number of frames received with
BECN/FECN.
ipadDLCIrxCongAlarm
ipadUserTxExceeded
25006
This trap is sent out when the Tx
throughput threshold in bits per
second has been exceeded. This
threshold represents the number
of bits for the user-selected
protocol.
ipadUserTxAlmAlarm
ipadDlciRxBECNinCIRAlarm
25007
This trap is sent out when a frame
with BECN set has been received
within CIR.
ipadDLCIrxBECNinCIR
IpadDlciUASExceeded
25008
This trap is sent out when the
UAS (unavailable seconds)
Threshold for the DLCI has been
exceeded.
ipadDLCIUASAlarm
IpadserialDteDTRAlarmExists
25009
This trap is sent out when a DTR
Loss alarm is declared.
serialDteDTRAlarmStatus
ipadt1e1ESAlarmDeclared
25010
This trap is sent out when an
Errored Seconds alarm is
declared.
t1e1ESCount
ipadt1e1SESAlarmDeclared
25011
This trap is sent out when a
Severely Errored Seconds alarm
is declared.
t1e1SESCount
WANsuite 5160/5130
VarBinds
ipadt1e1LOSSAlarmDeclared
25012
This trap is sent out when a Loss
of Signal Seconds alarm is
declared.
t1e1LOSSCount
ipadt1e1UASAlarmDeclared
25013
This trap is sent out when an
Unavailable Seconds alarm is
declared.
t1e1UASCount
ipadt1e1CSSAlarmDeclared
25014
This trap is sent out when a
Controlled Slip Seconds alarm is
declared.
t1e1CSSCount
ipadt1e1BPVSAlarmDeclared
25015
This trap is sent out when a
Bipolar Violation Seconds alarm
is declared.
t1e1BPVSCount
ipadt1e1OOFSAlarmDeclared
25016
This trap is sent out when an Out
of Frame Seconds alarm is
declared.
t1e1OOFSCount
ipadt1e1AISAlarmExists
25017
This trap is sent out when an
Alarm Indication Signal alarm is
declared.
t1e1AISCount
ipadt1e1RASAlarmExists
25018
This trap is sent out when a
Remote Alarm Signal alarm is
declared.
t1e1RASCount
ipadDLCIremoteSOSAlarm
25019
This trap is sent when the remote
unit for a DLCI senses and
reports an SOS condition.
ipadDLCIremoteEquipActive
ipadDdsLOSSAlarmDeclared
25020
This trap is sent out when a Loss
of Signal Seconds alarm is
declared.
ddsNetLOSCount
ipadDdsOOFSAlarmDeclared
25021
This trap is sent out when an Out
of Frame Seconds alarm is
declared.
ddsNetOOFCount
ipadDdsOOSSAlarmDeclared
25022
This trap is sent out when an Out
of Service Seconds alarm is
declared.
ddsNetOOSCount
ipadDdsFDLSAlarmDeclared
25023
This trap is sent out when a FDL
error Seconds alarm is declared.
ddsNetFDLCount
ipadDdsBPVSAlarmDeclared
25024
This trap is sent out when a
Bipolar Violation Seconds alarm
is declared.
ddsNetBPVCount
ipadDS0HighAlarmDeclared
25025
This trap is sent out when a high
utilization alarm is declared.
ipadDS0ConfigHighUtilCount
ipadDS0LowAlarmDeclared
25026
This trap is sent out when a low
utilization alarm is declared.
ipadDS0ConfigLowUtilAlarm
ipadHDLCRxHighAlarmDeclared
25027
This trap is sent out when a high
Rx utilization alarm is declared.
ipadHDLCConfigRxHighUtil
Count
ipadHDLCRxLowAlarmDeclared
25028
This trap is sent out when a low
Rx utilization alarm is declared.
ipadHDLCConfigRxLow
UtilAlarm
SNMP Agent
B-9
ipadHDLCTxHighAlarmDeclared
25029
This trap is sent out when a high
Tx utilization alarm is declared.
ipadHDLCConfigTxHighUtil
Count
IpadHDLCTxLowAlarmDeclared
25030
This trap is sent out when a low
Tx utilization alarm is declared.
ipadHDLCConfigTxLow
UtilAlarm
IpadPPPStartAuthFailureTrap
25050
ipadPPPStartAuthFailure
Count
Generic MIB Loading Instructions
The MIBs were written using the standard ASN.1 notation. Any standard SNMP
manager should be able to compile the MIBs. Although the exact procedure for
loading MIBs may vary from one platform to another, the following basic steps
are the same.
1 The SNMP manager has a directory for MIBs. Copy the files
ds8200tc.mib, ds8200v2.mib, ipadv2.mib, ipstart.mib,
router.mib, and hdsl2.mib into this directory. The MIBs use a
DOS format; therefore, a DOS2UNIX command may have to be used for
UNIX workstations (typical directories are snmp_mibs for HP’s
OpenViewâ, bin for Sun’s NetManagerä , and mibfiles for Castle
Rock Computing’s SNMPcä ).
2 Start the SNMP manager if it is not already running. Select one of the
menu selections (or selection subheadings) that contains the SNMP MIB
operations (this is Options subheading for HP OpenView and Config
subheading for SNMPc).
3 Choose the option for LOADING or COMPILING MIBs. You must
specify which MIBs to load.
4 Once the manager has successfully loaded the MIBs, you are ready to
manage the Verilink product. If you have any questions please call
Verilink Product Support.
B-10
WANsuite 5160/5130
Five-Year Hardware Limited Warranty
I.
Limited Warranty. Subject to the limitations and disclaimers set forth in this Hardware Limited Warranty, Verilink warrants to the original purchaser (“Buyer”) that the Verilink equipment and component parts (“Goods”) purchased by Buyer shall be free from defects in material and
workmanship under normal use and service for a period of five years from the date of shipment of the Goods to Buyer (“Limited Warranty”).
Verilink’s sole obligation and Buyer’s sole remedy under this Limited Warranty shall be to repair or replace any Verilink Goods that Verilink
determines to be so defective. Any claim by Buyer under this Limited Warranty must be presented to Verilink in writing within five years and
fifteen (15) days of the date of shipment of the Goods to Buyer, as evidenced by Verilink’s packing slip or similar shipment documentation from
a Verilink authorized reseller. Any replacement Goods may be new or reconditioned. Verilink reserves the right to substitute equivalent Goods
for defective Goods, in its sole discretion. As long as Verilink either so repairs or replaces the Goods, this Limited Warranty will not be found to
have failed its essential purpose. If the defect has been caused by accident, misuse or abnormal operating conditions (including lightning damage) occurring after delivery to Buyer, repairs and/or replacement will be made at Buyer’s expense. In such event, an estimate of cost will be
submitted to Buyer before repair work is started. The Limited Warranty will continue to apply to replaced or repaired Goods for whichever is
longer: the 90-day period after the shipment of such Goods to Buyer or the remainder of the original Limited Warranty period.
II.
EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR OTHER REPRESENTATION. THE GOODS ARE SOLD BY VERILINK “AS IS” WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OR GUARANTEE OF ANY KIND OTHER THAN THE LIMITED WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE, WHICH
IS MADE EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, AND VERILINK HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT, AND ALL OTHER IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE PART OF VERILINK. VERILINK DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE
BUYER'S USE OF THE GOODS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED, SECURE, OR ERROR-FREE. Buyer agrees that no oral or written representation, advice, advertisement or other statement by Verilink, its reseller, agent, employee, or representative constitutes any warranty, guarantee or modification of the foregoing disclaimer and Limited Warranty, and Buyer acknowledges that no person, including resellers, agents,
employees, or representatives of Verilink, is authorized to assume for Verilink any other liability on its behalf except as set forth in this paragraph.
III.
LIMITATION ON LIABILITY. IN NO EVENT SHALL VERILINK, ITS OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, OR SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, INCIDENTAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, DATA LOSS, DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT, OR THE
LIKE), REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM IS BASED ON BREACH OF WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR OTHER LEGAL THEORY, EVEN IF VERILINK OR ITS AGENT WAS ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT WILL VERILINK’S LIABILITY TO BUYER OR ANY SUCCESSOR TO BUYER EXCEED THE PRICE
PAID FOR THE APPLICABLE GOODS.
IV.
LIMITED WARRANTY CONDITIONS. The Limited Warranty shall be void (i) with respect to any Goods that have been repaired or altered
outside Verilink’s factory, unless Verilink specifically authorized such repairs or alterations; (ii) in the event parts not made or recommended by
Verilink are used by Buyer in the Goods; or (iii) if the Goods are used by Buyer other than in the manner intended by Verilink or other than in
conformance with operating instructions and specifications provided by Verilink.
V.
MODIFICATIONS BY VERILINK. Minor deviations from specifications that do not materially affect performance of the Goods covered
hereby, as mutually agreed upon by Verilink and Buyer, shall not be deemed to constitute a breach of the Limited Warranty. Verilink also
reserves the right to discontinue Goods and change specifications for Goods without notice, provided such changes do not adversely affect the
performance of the Goods manufactured by Verilink or do not reduce performance below any applicable contract specifications between Verilink and the Buyer. Verilink also reserves the right to make product improvements without incurring any obligations or liability to make the
same changes in Goods previously manufactured or purchased. Non-payment of any invoice rendered within the stated payment terms automatically suspends the application of, but not the running of, the Limited Warranty for the duration of the non-payment.
VI.
AMENDMENT OF WARRANTY TERMS. These terms and conditions of this Hardware Limited Warranty may be revised by Verilink from
time to time in its sole discretion. The terms and conditions in effect at the time of purchase will apply to such Goods.
VII.
RETURN OF GOODS. If for any reason the Buyer must return a Verilink product, it must be returned to the factory, shipping prepaid, and packaged to the best commercial standard for electronic equipment. Verilink will pay shipping charges for delivery on return. The Buyer is responsible for mode and cost of shipment to Verilink. The Buyer must have a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number marked on the shipping
package. Products sent to Verilink without RMA numbers will be returned to the sender, unopened, at the sender’s expense. A product sent
directly to Verilink for repair must first be assigned an RMA number. The Buyer may obtain an RMA number by calling the Verilink Customer
Service Center at 1.800.926.0085, extension 2282 or 2322. When calling Verilink for an RMA, the Buyer should have the following information available:
• Model number and serial number for each unit
• Reason for return and symptoms of problem
• Purchase order number to cover charges for out-of-warranty items
• Name and phone number of person to contact if Verilink has questions about the unit(s).
A return address will be provided at the time the RMA number is issued. The standard delivery method for return shipments is Standard Ground
for domestic returns and International Economy for international returns (unless otherwise specified).
VIII.
GOVERNING LAW. This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State of Alabama, U.S.A., without reference to its conflicts of law provisions. The provisions of the UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising